blob: 2d182631511ff117a45e360c010021463dbc2296 [file] [log] [blame]
Bram Moolenaar09c6f262019-11-17 15:55:14 +01001*syntax.txt* For Vim version 8.1. Last change: 2019 Nov 14
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002
3
4 VIM REFERENCE MANUAL by Bram Moolenaar
5
6
7Syntax highlighting *syntax* *syntax-highlighting* *coloring*
8
9Syntax highlighting enables Vim to show parts of the text in another font or
10color. Those parts can be specific keywords or text matching a pattern. Vim
11doesn't parse the whole file (to keep it fast), so the highlighting has its
12limitations. Lexical highlighting might be a better name, but since everybody
13calls it syntax highlighting we'll stick with that.
14
15Vim supports syntax highlighting on all terminals. But since most ordinary
16terminals have very limited highlighting possibilities, it works best in the
17GUI version, gvim.
18
19In the User Manual:
20|usr_06.txt| introduces syntax highlighting.
21|usr_44.txt| introduces writing a syntax file.
22
231. Quick start |:syn-qstart|
242. Syntax files |:syn-files|
253. Syntax loading procedure |syntax-loading|
Bram Moolenaar9d87a372018-12-18 21:41:50 +0100264. Converting to HTML |2html.vim|
275. Syntax file remarks |:syn-file-remarks|
286. Defining a syntax |:syn-define|
297. :syntax arguments |:syn-arguments|
308. Syntax patterns |:syn-pattern|
319. Syntax clusters |:syn-cluster|
Bram Moolenaarc8c88492018-12-27 23:59:26 +01003210. Including syntax files |:syn-include|
Bram Moolenaar9d87a372018-12-18 21:41:50 +01003311. Synchronizing |:syn-sync|
3412. Listing syntax items |:syntax|
3513. Highlight command |:highlight|
3614. Linking groups |:highlight-link|
3715. Cleaning up |:syn-clear|
3816. Highlighting tags |tag-highlight|
3917. Window-local syntax |:ownsyntax|
4018. Color xterms |xterm-color|
4119. When syntax is slow |:syntime|
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +000042
43{Vi does not have any of these commands}
44
45Syntax highlighting is not available when the |+syntax| feature has been
46disabled at compile time.
47
48==============================================================================
491. Quick start *:syn-qstart*
50
51 *:syn-enable* *:syntax-enable*
52This command switches on syntax highlighting: >
53
54 :syntax enable
55
56What this command actually does is to execute the command >
57 :source $VIMRUNTIME/syntax/syntax.vim
58
59If the VIM environment variable is not set, Vim will try to find
60the path in another way (see |$VIMRUNTIME|). Usually this works just
61fine. If it doesn't, try setting the VIM environment variable to the
62directory where the Vim stuff is located. For example, if your syntax files
Bram Moolenaar2e693a82019-10-16 22:35:02 +020063are in the "/usr/vim/vim81/syntax" directory, set $VIMRUNTIME to
64"/usr/vim/vim81". You must do this in the shell, before starting Vim.
Bram Moolenaar01164a62017-11-02 22:58:42 +010065This command also sources the |menu.vim| script when the GUI is running or
66will start soon. See |'go-M'| about avoiding that.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +000067
68 *:syn-on* *:syntax-on*
Bram Moolenaar01164a62017-11-02 22:58:42 +010069The `:syntax enable` command will keep your current color settings. This
70allows using `:highlight` commands to set your preferred colors before or
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +000071after using this command. If you want Vim to overrule your settings with the
72defaults, use: >
73 :syntax on
74<
75 *:hi-normal* *:highlight-normal*
76If you are running in the GUI, you can get white text on a black background
77with: >
78 :highlight Normal guibg=Black guifg=White
79For a color terminal see |:hi-normal-cterm|.
80For setting up your own colors syntax highlighting see |syncolor|.
81
82NOTE: The syntax files on MS-DOS and Windows have lines that end in <CR><NL>.
83The files for Unix end in <NL>. This means you should use the right type of
84file for your system. Although on MS-DOS and Windows the right format is
85automatically selected if the 'fileformats' option is not empty.
86
87NOTE: When using reverse video ("gvim -fg white -bg black"), the default value
88of 'background' will not be set until the GUI window is opened, which is after
Bram Moolenaar910f66f2006-04-05 20:41:53 +000089reading the |gvimrc|. This will cause the wrong default highlighting to be
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +000090used. To set the default value of 'background' before switching on
Bram Moolenaar910f66f2006-04-05 20:41:53 +000091highlighting, include the ":gui" command in the |gvimrc|: >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +000092
93 :gui " open window and set default for 'background'
94 :syntax on " start highlighting, use 'background' to set colors
95
Bram Moolenaar910f66f2006-04-05 20:41:53 +000096NOTE: Using ":gui" in the |gvimrc| means that "gvim -f" won't start in the
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +000097foreground! Use ":gui -f" then.
98
Bram Moolenaar09092152010-08-08 16:38:42 +020099 *g:syntax_on*
100You can toggle the syntax on/off with this command: >
101 :if exists("g:syntax_on") | syntax off | else | syntax enable | endif
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000102
103To put this into a mapping, you can use: >
Bram Moolenaar09092152010-08-08 16:38:42 +0200104 :map <F7> :if exists("g:syntax_on") <Bar>
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000105 \ syntax off <Bar>
106 \ else <Bar>
107 \ syntax enable <Bar>
108 \ endif <CR>
109[using the |<>| notation, type this literally]
110
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +0000111Details:
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000112The ":syntax" commands are implemented by sourcing a file. To see exactly how
113this works, look in the file:
114 command file ~
115 :syntax enable $VIMRUNTIME/syntax/syntax.vim
116 :syntax on $VIMRUNTIME/syntax/syntax.vim
117 :syntax manual $VIMRUNTIME/syntax/manual.vim
118 :syntax off $VIMRUNTIME/syntax/nosyntax.vim
119Also see |syntax-loading|.
120
Bram Moolenaar8f3f58f2010-01-06 20:52:26 +0100121NOTE: If displaying long lines is slow and switching off syntax highlighting
122makes it fast, consider setting the 'synmaxcol' option to a lower value.
123
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000124==============================================================================
1252. Syntax files *:syn-files*
126
127The syntax and highlighting commands for one language are normally stored in
128a syntax file. The name convention is: "{name}.vim". Where {name} is the
129name of the language, or an abbreviation (to fit the name in 8.3 characters,
130a requirement in case the file is used on a DOS filesystem).
131Examples:
132 c.vim perl.vim java.vim html.vim
133 cpp.vim sh.vim csh.vim
134
135The syntax file can contain any Ex commands, just like a vimrc file. But
136the idea is that only commands for a specific language are included. When a
137language is a superset of another language, it may include the other one,
138for example, the cpp.vim file could include the c.vim file: >
139 :so $VIMRUNTIME/syntax/c.vim
140
141The .vim files are normally loaded with an autocommand. For example: >
142 :au Syntax c runtime! syntax/c.vim
143 :au Syntax cpp runtime! syntax/cpp.vim
144These commands are normally in the file $VIMRUNTIME/syntax/synload.vim.
145
146
147MAKING YOUR OWN SYNTAX FILES *mysyntaxfile*
148
149When you create your own syntax files, and you want to have Vim use these
150automatically with ":syntax enable", do this:
151
1521. Create your user runtime directory. You would normally use the first item
153 of the 'runtimepath' option. Example for Unix: >
154 mkdir ~/.vim
155
1562. Create a directory in there called "syntax". For Unix: >
157 mkdir ~/.vim/syntax
158
1593. Write the Vim syntax file. Or download one from the internet. Then write
160 it in your syntax directory. For example, for the "mine" syntax: >
161 :w ~/.vim/syntax/mine.vim
162
163Now you can start using your syntax file manually: >
164 :set syntax=mine
165You don't have to exit Vim to use this.
166
167If you also want Vim to detect the type of file, see |new-filetype|.
168
169If you are setting up a system with many users and you don't want each user
170to add the same syntax file, you can use another directory from 'runtimepath'.
171
172
173ADDING TO AN EXISTING SYNTAX FILE *mysyntaxfile-add*
174
175If you are mostly satisfied with an existing syntax file, but would like to
176add a few items or change the highlighting, follow these steps:
177
1781. Create your user directory from 'runtimepath', see above.
179
1802. Create a directory in there called "after/syntax". For Unix: >
181 mkdir ~/.vim/after
182 mkdir ~/.vim/after/syntax
183
1843. Write a Vim script that contains the commands you want to use. For
185 example, to change the colors for the C syntax: >
186 highlight cComment ctermfg=Green guifg=Green
187
1884. Write that file in the "after/syntax" directory. Use the name of the
189 syntax, with ".vim" added. For our C syntax: >
190 :w ~/.vim/after/syntax/c.vim
191
192That's it. The next time you edit a C file the Comment color will be
193different. You don't even have to restart Vim.
194
Bram Moolenaar5313dcb2005-02-22 08:56:13 +0000195If you have multiple files, you can use the filetype as the directory name.
196All the "*.vim" files in this directory will be used, for example:
197 ~/.vim/after/syntax/c/one.vim
198 ~/.vim/after/syntax/c/two.vim
199
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000200
201REPLACING AN EXISTING SYNTAX FILE *mysyntaxfile-replace*
202
203If you don't like a distributed syntax file, or you have downloaded a new
204version, follow the same steps as for |mysyntaxfile| above. Just make sure
205that you write the syntax file in a directory that is early in 'runtimepath'.
Bram Moolenaar61d35bd2012-03-28 20:51:51 +0200206Vim will only load the first syntax file found, assuming that it sets
207b:current_syntax.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000208
209
Bram Moolenaar8f3f58f2010-01-06 20:52:26 +0100210NAMING CONVENTIONS *group-name* *{group-name}* *E669* *W18*
211
212A syntax group name is to be used for syntax items that match the same kind of
213thing. These are then linked to a highlight group that specifies the color.
214A syntax group name doesn't specify any color or attributes itself.
215
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000216The name for a highlight or syntax group must consist of ASCII letters, digits
Bram Moolenaar2b8388b2015-02-28 13:11:45 +0100217and the underscore. As a regexp: "[a-zA-Z0-9_]*". However, Vim does not give
218an error when using other characters.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000219
220To be able to allow each user to pick his favorite set of colors, there must
221be preferred names for highlight groups that are common for many languages.
222These are the suggested group names (if syntax highlighting works properly
223you can see the actual color, except for "Ignore"):
224
225 *Comment any comment
226
227 *Constant any constant
228 String a string constant: "this is a string"
229 Character a character constant: 'c', '\n'
230 Number a number constant: 234, 0xff
231 Boolean a boolean constant: TRUE, false
232 Float a floating point constant: 2.3e10
233
234 *Identifier any variable name
235 Function function name (also: methods for classes)
236
237 *Statement any statement
238 Conditional if, then, else, endif, switch, etc.
239 Repeat for, do, while, etc.
240 Label case, default, etc.
241 Operator "sizeof", "+", "*", etc.
242 Keyword any other keyword
243 Exception try, catch, throw
244
245 *PreProc generic Preprocessor
246 Include preprocessor #include
247 Define preprocessor #define
248 Macro same as Define
249 PreCondit preprocessor #if, #else, #endif, etc.
250
251 *Type int, long, char, etc.
252 StorageClass static, register, volatile, etc.
253 Structure struct, union, enum, etc.
254 Typedef A typedef
255
256 *Special any special symbol
257 SpecialChar special character in a constant
258 Tag you can use CTRL-] on this
259 Delimiter character that needs attention
260 SpecialComment special things inside a comment
261 Debug debugging statements
262
263 *Underlined text that stands out, HTML links
264
Bram Moolenaar4f99eae2010-07-24 15:56:43 +0200265 *Ignore left blank, hidden |hl-Ignore|
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000266
267 *Error any erroneous construct
268
269 *Todo anything that needs extra attention; mostly the
270 keywords TODO FIXME and XXX
271
272The names marked with * are the preferred groups; the others are minor groups.
273For the preferred groups, the "syntax.vim" file contains default highlighting.
274The minor groups are linked to the preferred groups, so they get the same
275highlighting. You can override these defaults by using ":highlight" commands
276after sourcing the "syntax.vim" file.
277
278Note that highlight group names are not case sensitive. "String" and "string"
279can be used for the same group.
280
281The following names are reserved and cannot be used as a group name:
282 NONE ALL ALLBUT contains contained
283
Bram Moolenaar4f99eae2010-07-24 15:56:43 +0200284 *hl-Ignore*
285When using the Ignore group, you may also consider using the conceal
286mechanism. See |conceal|.
287
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000288==============================================================================
2893. Syntax loading procedure *syntax-loading*
290
291This explains the details that happen when the command ":syntax enable" is
292issued. When Vim initializes itself, it finds out where the runtime files are
293located. This is used here as the variable |$VIMRUNTIME|.
294
295":syntax enable" and ":syntax on" do the following:
296
297 Source $VIMRUNTIME/syntax/syntax.vim
298 |
299 +- Clear out any old syntax by sourcing $VIMRUNTIME/syntax/nosyntax.vim
300 |
301 +- Source first syntax/synload.vim in 'runtimepath'
302 | |
303 | +- Setup the colors for syntax highlighting. If a color scheme is
304 | | defined it is loaded again with ":colors {name}". Otherwise
305 | | ":runtime! syntax/syncolor.vim" is used. ":syntax on" overrules
306 | | existing colors, ":syntax enable" only sets groups that weren't
307 | | set yet.
308 | |
309 | +- Set up syntax autocmds to load the appropriate syntax file when
310 | | the 'syntax' option is set. *synload-1*
311 | |
312 | +- Source the user's optional file, from the |mysyntaxfile| variable.
313 | This is for backwards compatibility with Vim 5.x only. *synload-2*
314 |
315 +- Do ":filetype on", which does ":runtime! filetype.vim". It loads any
316 | filetype.vim files found. It should always Source
317 | $VIMRUNTIME/filetype.vim, which does the following.
318 | |
319 | +- Install autocmds based on suffix to set the 'filetype' option
320 | | This is where the connection between file name and file type is
321 | | made for known file types. *synload-3*
322 | |
323 | +- Source the user's optional file, from the *myfiletypefile*
324 | | variable. This is for backwards compatibility with Vim 5.x only.
325 | | *synload-4*
326 | |
327 | +- Install one autocommand which sources scripts.vim when no file
328 | | type was detected yet. *synload-5*
329 | |
330 | +- Source $VIMRUNTIME/menu.vim, to setup the Syntax menu. |menu.vim|
331 |
332 +- Install a FileType autocommand to set the 'syntax' option when a file
333 | type has been detected. *synload-6*
334 |
335 +- Execute syntax autocommands to start syntax highlighting for each
336 already loaded buffer.
337
338
339Upon loading a file, Vim finds the relevant syntax file as follows:
340
341 Loading the file triggers the BufReadPost autocommands.
342 |
343 +- If there is a match with one of the autocommands from |synload-3|
344 | (known file types) or |synload-4| (user's file types), the 'filetype'
345 | option is set to the file type.
346 |
347 +- The autocommand at |synload-5| is triggered. If the file type was not
348 | found yet, then scripts.vim is searched for in 'runtimepath'. This
349 | should always load $VIMRUNTIME/scripts.vim, which does the following.
350 | |
351 | +- Source the user's optional file, from the *myscriptsfile*
352 | | variable. This is for backwards compatibility with Vim 5.x only.
353 | |
354 | +- If the file type is still unknown, check the contents of the file,
355 | again with checks like "getline(1) =~ pattern" as to whether the
356 | file type can be recognized, and set 'filetype'.
357 |
358 +- When the file type was determined and 'filetype' was set, this
359 | triggers the FileType autocommand |synload-6| above. It sets
360 | 'syntax' to the determined file type.
361 |
362 +- When the 'syntax' option was set above, this triggers an autocommand
363 | from |synload-1| (and |synload-2|). This find the main syntax file in
364 | 'runtimepath', with this command:
365 | runtime! syntax/<name>.vim
366 |
367 +- Any other user installed FileType or Syntax autocommands are
368 triggered. This can be used to change the highlighting for a specific
369 syntax.
370
371==============================================================================
Bram Moolenaar9d87a372018-12-18 21:41:50 +01003724. Conversion to HTML *2html.vim* *convert-to-HTML*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000373
Bram Moolenaar9d87a372018-12-18 21:41:50 +01003742html is not a syntax file itself, but a script that converts the current
Bram Moolenaar31c31672013-06-26 13:28:14 +0200375window into HTML. Vim opens a new window in which it builds the HTML file.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000376
Bram Moolenaar31c31672013-06-26 13:28:14 +0200377After you save the resulting file, you can view it with any browser. The
378colors should be exactly the same as you see them in Vim. With
379|g:html_line_ids| you can jump to specific lines by adding (for example) #L123
380or #123 to the end of the URL in your browser's address bar. And with
Bram Moolenaar543b7ef2013-06-01 14:50:56 +0200381|g:html_dynamic_folds| enabled, you can show or hide the text that is folded
382in Vim.
Bram Moolenaar6c35bea2012-07-25 17:49:10 +0200383
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000384You are not supposed to set the 'filetype' or 'syntax' option to "2html"!
385Source the script to convert the current file: >
386
387 :runtime! syntax/2html.vim
388<
Bram Moolenaar6c35bea2012-07-25 17:49:10 +0200389Many variables affect the output of 2html.vim; see below. Any of the on/off
390options listed below can be enabled or disabled by setting them explicitly to
391the desired value, or restored to their default by removing the variable using
392|:unlet|.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000393
394Remarks:
Bram Moolenaar076e8b22010-08-05 21:54:00 +0200395- Some truly ancient browsers may not show the background colors.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000396- From most browsers you can also print the file (in color)!
Bram Moolenaar6c35bea2012-07-25 17:49:10 +0200397- The latest TOhtml may actually work with older versions of Vim, but some
Bram Moolenaar166af9b2010-11-16 20:34:40 +0100398 features such as conceal support will not function, and the colors may be
399 incorrect for an old Vim without GUI support compiled in.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000400
401Here is an example how to run the script over all .c and .h files from a
402Unix shell: >
403 for f in *.[ch]; do gvim -f +"syn on" +"run! syntax/2html.vim" +"wq" +"q" $f; done
404<
Bram Moolenaar6c35bea2012-07-25 17:49:10 +0200405 *g:html_start_line* *g:html_end_line*
406To restrict the conversion to a range of lines, use a range with the |:TOhtml|
407command below, or set "g:html_start_line" and "g:html_end_line" to the first
408and last line to be converted. Example, using the last set Visual area: >
409
410 :let g:html_start_line = line("'<")
411 :let g:html_end_line = line("'>")
412 :runtime! syntax/2html.vim
413<
414 *:TOhtml*
415:[range]TOhtml The ":TOhtml" command is defined in a standard plugin.
416 This command will source |2html.vim| for you. When a
Bram Moolenaar60cce2f2015-10-13 23:21:27 +0200417 range is given, this command sets |g:html_start_line|
418 and |g:html_end_line| to the start and end of the
419 range, respectively. Default range is the entire
420 buffer.
Bram Moolenaar6c35bea2012-07-25 17:49:10 +0200421
Bram Moolenaar60cce2f2015-10-13 23:21:27 +0200422 If the current window is part of a |diff|, unless
423 |g:html_diff_one_file| is set, :TOhtml will convert
424 all windows which are part of the diff in the current
425 tab and place them side-by-side in a <table> element
426 in the generated HTML. With |g:html_line_ids| you can
427 jump to lines in specific windows with (for example)
428 #W1L42 for line 42 in the first diffed window, or
429 #W3L87 for line 87 in the third.
Bram Moolenaar6c35bea2012-07-25 17:49:10 +0200430
431 Examples: >
432
433 :10,40TOhtml " convert lines 10-40 to html
434 :'<,'>TOhtml " convert current/last visual selection
435 :TOhtml " convert entire buffer
436<
437 *g:html_diff_one_file*
438Default: 0.
Bram Moolenaar31c31672013-06-26 13:28:14 +0200439When 0, and using |:TOhtml| all windows involved in a |diff| in the current tab
440page are converted to HTML and placed side-by-side in a <table> element. When
4411, only the current buffer is converted.
Bram Moolenaar6c35bea2012-07-25 17:49:10 +0200442Example: >
443
444 let g:html_diff_one_file = 1
445<
446 *g:html_whole_filler*
447Default: 0.
448When 0, if |g:html_diff_one_file| is 1, a sequence of more than 3 filler lines
449is displayed as three lines with the middle line mentioning the total number
450of inserted lines.
451When 1, always display all inserted lines as if |g:html_diff_one_file| were
452not set.
453>
454 :let g:html_whole_filler = 1
455<
456 *TOhtml-performance* *g:html_no_progress*
457Default: 0.
458When 0, display a progress bar in the statusline for each major step in the
4592html.vim conversion process.
460When 1, do not display the progress bar. This offers a minor speed improvement
461but you won't have any idea how much longer the conversion might take; for big
462files it can take a long time!
463Example: >
464
465 let g:html_no_progress = 1
466<
467You can obtain better performance improvements by also instructing Vim to not
468run interactively, so that too much time is not taken to redraw as the script
469moves through the buffer, switches windows, and the like: >
470
471 vim -E -s -c "let g:html_no_progress=1" -c "syntax on" -c "set ft=c" -c "runtime syntax/2html.vim" -cwqa myfile.c
472<
473Note that the -s flag prevents loading your .vimrc and any plugins, so you
474need to explicitly source/enable anything that will affect the HTML
475conversion. See |-E| and |-s-ex| for details. It is probably best to create a
476script to replace all the -c commands and use it with the -u flag instead of
477specifying each command separately.
478
Bram Moolenaar09c6f262019-11-17 15:55:14 +0100479 *hl-TOhtmlProgress* *TOhtml-progress-color*
480When displayed, the progress bar will show colored boxes along the statusline
481as the HTML conversion proceeds. By default, the background color as the
482current "DiffDelete" highlight group is used. If "DiffDelete" and "StatusLine"
483have the same background color, TOhtml will automatically adjust the color to
484differ. If you do not like the automatically selected colors, you can define
485your own highlight colors for the progress bar. Example: >
486
487 hi TOhtmlProgress guifg=#c0ffee ctermbg=7
488<
Bram Moolenaar6c35bea2012-07-25 17:49:10 +0200489 *g:html_number_lines*
490Default: current 'number' setting.
491When 0, buffer text is displayed in the generated HTML without line numbering.
492When 1, a column of line numbers is added to the generated HTML with the same
493highlighting as the line number column in Vim (|hl-LineNr|).
494Force line numbers even if 'number' is not set: >
495 :let g:html_number_lines = 1
496Force to omit the line numbers: >
497 :let g:html_number_lines = 0
498Go back to the default to use 'number' by deleting the variable: >
499 :unlet g:html_number_lines
500<
Bram Moolenaar31c31672013-06-26 13:28:14 +0200501 *g:html_line_ids*
502Default: 1 if |g:html_number_lines| is set, 0 otherwise.
503When 1, adds an HTML id attribute to each line number, or to an empty <span>
504inserted for that purpose if no line numbers are shown. This ID attribute
505takes the form of L123 for single-buffer HTML pages, or W2L123 for diff-view
506pages, and is used to jump to a specific line (in a specific window of a diff
507view). Javascript is inserted to open any closed dynamic folds
Bram Moolenaar34401cc2014-08-29 15:12:19 +0200508(|g:html_dynamic_folds|) containing the specified line before jumping. The
Bram Moolenaar31c31672013-06-26 13:28:14 +0200509javascript also allows omitting the window ID in the url, and the leading L.
510For example: >
511
512 page.html#L123 jumps to line 123 in a single-buffer file
513 page.html#123 does the same
514
515 diff.html#W1L42 jumps to line 42 in the first window in a diff
516 diff.html#42 does the same
517<
Bram Moolenaar6c35bea2012-07-25 17:49:10 +0200518 *g:html_use_css*
519Default: 1.
Bram Moolenaar09c6f262019-11-17 15:55:14 +0100520When 1, generate valid HTML 5 markup with CSS styling, supported in all modern
521browsers and many old browsers.
Bram Moolenaar6c35bea2012-07-25 17:49:10 +0200522When 0, generate <font> tags and similar outdated markup. This is not
523recommended but it may work better in really old browsers, email clients,
524forum posts, and similar situations where basic CSS support is unavailable.
525Example: >
526 :let g:html_use_css = 0
527<
528 *g:html_ignore_conceal*
529Default: 0.
530When 0, concealed text is removed from the HTML and replaced with a character
531from |:syn-cchar| or 'listchars' as appropriate, depending on the current
532value of 'conceallevel'.
533When 1, include all text from the buffer in the generated HTML, even if it is
534|conceal|ed.
535
536Either of the following commands will ensure that all text in the buffer is
537included in the generated HTML (unless it is folded): >
538 :let g:html_ignore_conceal = 1
539 :setl conceallevel=0
540<
541 *g:html_ignore_folding*
542Default: 0.
543When 0, text in a closed fold is replaced by the text shown for the fold in
544Vim (|fold-foldtext|). See |g:html_dynamic_folds| if you also want to allow
545the user to expand the fold as in Vim to see the text inside.
546When 1, include all text from the buffer in the generated HTML; whether the
547text is in a fold has no impact at all. |g:html_dynamic_folds| has no effect.
548
549Either of these commands will ensure that all text in the buffer is included
550in the generated HTML (unless it is concealed): >
551 zR
552 :let g:html_ignore_folding = 1
553<
554 *g:html_dynamic_folds*
555Default: 0.
556When 0, text in a closed fold is not included at all in the generated HTML.
557When 1, generate javascript to open a fold and show the text within, just like
558in Vim.
559
560Setting this variable to 1 causes 2html.vim to always use CSS for styling,
561regardless of what |g:html_use_css| is set to.
562
563This variable is ignored when |g:html_ignore_folding| is set.
564>
565 :let g:html_dynamic_folds = 1
566<
567 *g:html_no_foldcolumn*
568Default: 0.
569When 0, if |g:html_dynamic_folds| is 1, generate a column of text similar to
570Vim's foldcolumn (|fold-foldcolumn|) the user can click on to toggle folds
571open or closed. The minimum width of the generated text column is the current
572'foldcolumn' setting.
573When 1, do not generate this column; instead, hovering the mouse cursor over
574folded text will open the fold as if |g:html_hover_unfold| were set.
575>
576 :let g:html_no_foldcolumn = 1
577<
578 *TOhtml-uncopyable-text* *g:html_prevent_copy*
579Default: empty string.
580This option prevents certain regions of the generated HTML from being copied,
581when you select all text in document rendered in a browser and copy it. Useful
582for allowing users to copy-paste only the source text even if a fold column or
583line numbers are shown in the generated content. Specify regions to be
584affected in this way as follows:
585 f: fold column
586 n: line numbers (also within fold text)
587 t: fold text
588 d: diff filler
589
590Example, to make the fold column and line numbers uncopyable: >
591 :let g:html_prevent_copy = "fn"
592<
Bram Moolenaar09c6f262019-11-17 15:55:14 +0100593The method used to prevent copying in the generated page depends on the value
594of |g:html_use_input_for_pc|.
595
596 *g:html_use_input_for_pc*
597Default: "fallback"
598If |g:html_prevent_copy| is non-empty, then:
599
600When "all", read-only <input> elements are used in place of normal text for
601uncopyable regions. In some browsers, especially older browsers, after
602selecting an entire page and copying the selection, the <input> tags are not
603pasted with the page text. If |g:html_no_invalid| is 0, the <input> tags have
604invalid type; this works in more browsers, but the page will not validate.
605Note: this method does NOT work in recent versions of Chrome and equivalent
606browsers; the <input> tags get pasted with the text.
607
608When "fallback" (default value), the same <input> elements are generated for
609older browsers, but newer browsers (detected by CSS feature query) hide the
610<input> elements and instead use generated content in an ::before pseudoelement
611to display the uncopyable text. This method should work with the largest
612number of browsers, both old and new.
613
614When "none", the <input> elements are not generated at all. Only the
615generated-content method is used. This means that old browsers, notably
616Internet Explorer, will either copy the text intended not to be copyable, or
617the non-copyable text may not appear at all. However, this is the most
618standards-based method, and there will be much less markup.
Bram Moolenaar6c35bea2012-07-25 17:49:10 +0200619
620 *g:html_no_invalid*
621Default: 0.
Bram Moolenaar09c6f262019-11-17 15:55:14 +0100622When 0, if |g:html_prevent_copy| is non-empty and |g:html_use_input_for_pc| is
623not "none", an invalid attribute is intentionally inserted into the <input>
624element for the uncopyable areas. This prevents pasting the <input> elements
625in some applications. Specifically, some versions of Microsoft Word will not
626paste the <input> elements if they contain this invalid attribute. When 1, no
627invalid markup is inserted, and the generated page should validate. However,
628<input> elements may be pasted into some applications and can be difficult to
629remove afterward.
Bram Moolenaar6c35bea2012-07-25 17:49:10 +0200630
631 *g:html_hover_unfold*
632Default: 0.
633When 0, the only way to open a fold generated by 2html.vim with
634|g:html_dynamic_folds| set, is to click on the generated fold column.
635When 1, use CSS 2.0 to allow the user to open a fold by moving the mouse
636cursor over the displayed fold text. This is useful to allow users with
637disabled javascript to view the folded text.
638
639Note that old browsers (notably Internet Explorer 6) will not support this
640feature. Browser-specific markup for IE6 is included to fall back to the
641normal CSS1 styling so that the folds show up correctly for this browser, but
642they will not be openable without a foldcolumn.
643>
644 :let g:html_hover_unfold = 1
645<
Bram Moolenaar31c31672013-06-26 13:28:14 +0200646 *g:html_id_expr*
647Default: ""
648Dynamic folding and jumping to line IDs rely on unique IDs within the document
649to work. If generated HTML is copied into a larger document, these IDs are no
650longer guaranteed to be unique. Set g:html_id_expr to an expression Vim can
651evaluate to get a unique string to append to each ID used in a given document,
652so that the full IDs will be unique even when combined with other content in a
653larger HTML document. Example, to append _ and the buffer number to each ID: >
654
655 :let g:html_id_expr = '"_".bufnr("%")'
656<
657To append a string "_mystring" to the end of each ID: >
658
659 :let g:html_id_expr = '"_mystring"'
660<
661Note, when converting a diff view to HTML, the expression will only be
662evaluated for the first window in the diff, and the result used for all the
663windows.
664
Bram Moolenaar6c35bea2012-07-25 17:49:10 +0200665 *TOhtml-wrap-text* *g:html_pre_wrap*
666Default: current 'wrap' setting.
667When 0, if |g:html_no_pre| is 0 or unset, the text in the generated HTML does
668not wrap at the edge of the browser window.
669When 1, if |g:html_use_css| is 1, the CSS 2.0 "white-space:pre-wrap" value is
670used, causing the text to wrap at whitespace at the edge of the browser
671window.
672Explicitly enable text wrapping: >
673 :let g:html_pre_wrap = 1
674Explicitly disable wrapping: >
675 :let g:html_pre_wrap = 0
676Go back to default, determine wrapping from 'wrap' setting: >
677 :unlet g:html_pre_wrap
678<
679 *g:html_no_pre*
680Default: 0.
681When 0, buffer text in the generated HTML is surrounded by <pre>...</pre>
682tags. Series of whitespace is shown as in Vim without special markup, and tab
683characters can be included literally (see |g:html_expand_tabs|).
684When 1 (not recommended), the <pre> tags are omitted, and a plain <div> is
685used instead. Whitespace is replaced by a series of &nbsp; character
686references, and <br> is used to end each line. This is another way to allow
687text in the generated HTML is wrap (see |g:html_pre_wrap|) which also works in
688old browsers, but may cause noticeable differences between Vim's display and
689the rendered page generated by 2html.vim.
690>
691 :let g:html_no_pre = 1
692<
693 *g:html_expand_tabs*
Bram Moolenaarf0d58ef2018-11-16 16:13:44 +0100694Default: 0 if 'tabstop' is 8, 'expandtab' is 0, 'vartabstop' is not in use,
695 and no fold column or line numbers occur in the generated HTML;
696 1 otherwise.
697When 1, <Tab> characters in the buffer text are replaced with an appropriate
Bram Moolenaar6c35bea2012-07-25 17:49:10 +0200698number of space characters, or &nbsp; references if |g:html_no_pre| is 1.
Bram Moolenaarf0d58ef2018-11-16 16:13:44 +0100699When 0, if |g:html_no_pre| is 0 or unset, <Tab> characters in the buffer text
Bram Moolenaar6c35bea2012-07-25 17:49:10 +0200700are included as-is in the generated HTML. This is useful for when you want to
701allow copy and paste from a browser without losing the actual whitespace in
702the source document. Note that this can easily break text alignment and
703indentation in the HTML, unless set by default.
704
705Force |2html.vim| to keep <Tab> characters: >
706 :let g:html_expand_tabs = 0
707<
708Force tabs to be expanded: >
709 :let g:html_expand_tabs = 1
710<
711 *TOhtml-encoding-detect* *TOhtml-encoding*
712It is highly recommended to set your desired encoding with
713|g:html_use_encoding| for any content which will be placed on a web server.
714
715If you do not specify an encoding, |2html.vim| uses the preferred IANA name
716for the current value of 'fileencoding' if set, or 'encoding' if not.
717'encoding' is always used for certain 'buftype' values. 'fileencoding' will be
718set to match the chosen document encoding.
719
720Automatic detection works for the encodings mentioned specifically by name in
721|encoding-names|, but TOhtml will only automatically use those encodings with
722wide browser support. However, you can override this to support specific
723encodings that may not be automatically detected by default (see options
724below). See http://www.iana.org/assignments/character-sets for the IANA names.
725
726Note, by default all Unicode encodings are converted to UTF-8 with no BOM in
727the generated HTML, as recommended by W3C:
728
729 http://www.w3.org/International/questions/qa-choosing-encodings
730 http://www.w3.org/International/questions/qa-byte-order-mark
731
732 *g:html_use_encoding*
733Default: none, uses IANA name for current 'fileencoding' as above.
734To overrule all automatic charset detection, set g:html_use_encoding to the
735name of the charset to be used. It is recommended to set this variable to
736something widely supported, like UTF-8, for anything you will be hosting on a
737webserver: >
738 :let g:html_use_encoding = "UTF-8"
739You can also use this option to omit the line that specifies the charset
740entirely, by setting g:html_use_encoding to an empty string (NOT recommended): >
741 :let g:html_use_encoding = ""
742To go back to the automatic mechanism, delete the |g:html_use_encoding|
743variable: >
744 :unlet g:html_use_encoding
745<
746 *g:html_encoding_override*
747Default: none, autoload/tohtml.vim contains default conversions for encodings
748 mentioned by name at |encoding-names|.
749This option allows |2html.vim| to detect the correct 'fileencoding' when you
750specify an encoding with |g:html_use_encoding| which is not in the default
751list of conversions.
752
753This is a dictionary of charset-encoding pairs that will replace existing
754pairs automatically detected by TOhtml, or supplement with new pairs.
755
756Detect the HTML charset "windows-1252" as the encoding "8bit-cp1252": >
757 :let g:html_encoding_override = {'windows-1252': '8bit-cp1252'}
758<
759 *g:html_charset_override*
760Default: none, autoload/tohtml.vim contains default conversions for encodings
761 mentioned by name at |encoding-names| and which have wide
762 browser support.
763This option allows |2html.vim| to detect the HTML charset for any
764'fileencoding' or 'encoding' which is not detected automatically. You can also
765use it to override specific existing encoding-charset pairs. For example,
766TOhtml will by default use UTF-8 for all Unicode/UCS encodings. To use UTF-16
767and UTF-32 instead, use: >
768 :let g:html_charset_override = {'ucs-4': 'UTF-32', 'utf-16': 'UTF-16'}
769
770Note that documents encoded in either UTF-32 or UTF-16 have known
771compatibility problems with some major browsers.
772
Bram Moolenaar60cce2f2015-10-13 23:21:27 +0200773 *g:html_font*
774Default: "monospace"
775You can specify the font or fonts used in the converted document using
776g:html_font. If this option is set to a string, then the value will be
777surrounded with single quotes. If this option is set to a list then each list
778item is surrounded by single quotes and the list is joined with commas. Either
779way, "monospace" is added as the fallback generic family name and the entire
780result used as the font family (using CSS) or font face (if not using CSS).
781Examples: >
782
783 " font-family: 'Consolas', monospace;
784 :let g:html_font = "Consolas"
785
786 " font-family: 'DejaVu Sans Mono', 'Consolas', monospace;
787 :let g:html_font = ["DejaVu Sans Mono", "Consolas"]
788<
Bram Moolenaar6c35bea2012-07-25 17:49:10 +0200789 *convert-to-XML* *convert-to-XHTML* *g:html_use_xhtml*
790Default: 0.
791When 0, generate standard HTML 4.01 (strict when possible).
792When 1, generate XHTML 1.0 instead (XML compliant HTML).
793>
794 :let g:html_use_xhtml = 1
795<
Bram Moolenaar9d87a372018-12-18 21:41:50 +0100796==============================================================================
7975. Syntax file remarks *:syn-file-remarks*
798
799 *b:current_syntax-variable*
800Vim stores the name of the syntax that has been loaded in the
801"b:current_syntax" variable. You can use this if you want to load other
802settings, depending on which syntax is active. Example: >
803 :au BufReadPost * if b:current_syntax == "csh"
804 :au BufReadPost * do-some-things
805 :au BufReadPost * endif
806
807
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000808
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000809ABEL *abel.vim* *ft-abel-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000810
811ABEL highlighting provides some user-defined options. To enable them, assign
812any value to the respective variable. Example: >
813 :let abel_obsolete_ok=1
814To disable them use ":unlet". Example: >
815 :unlet abel_obsolete_ok
816
817Variable Highlight ~
818abel_obsolete_ok obsolete keywords are statements, not errors
819abel_cpp_comments_illegal do not interpret '//' as inline comment leader
820
821
Bram Moolenaarc81e5e72007-05-05 18:24:42 +0000822ADA
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000823
Bram Moolenaarc81e5e72007-05-05 18:24:42 +0000824See |ft-ada-syntax|
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000825
826
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000827ANT *ant.vim* *ft-ant-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000828
829The ant syntax file provides syntax highlighting for javascript and python
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000830by default. Syntax highlighting for other script languages can be installed
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000831by the function AntSyntaxScript(), which takes the tag name as first argument
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000832and the script syntax file name as second argument. Example: >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000833
834 :call AntSyntaxScript('perl', 'perl.vim')
835
836will install syntax perl highlighting for the following ant code >
837
838 <script language = 'perl'><![CDATA[
839 # everything inside is highlighted as perl
840 ]]></script>
841
842See |mysyntaxfile-add| for installing script languages permanently.
843
844
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000845APACHE *apache.vim* *ft-apache-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000846
Bram Moolenaar01164a62017-11-02 22:58:42 +0100847The apache syntax file provides syntax highlighting for Apache HTTP server
848version 2.2.3.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000849
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000850
851 *asm.vim* *asmh8300.vim* *nasm.vim* *masm.vim* *asm68k*
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000852ASSEMBLY *ft-asm-syntax* *ft-asmh8300-syntax* *ft-nasm-syntax*
853 *ft-masm-syntax* *ft-asm68k-syntax* *fasm.vim*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000854
855Files matching "*.i" could be Progress or Assembly. If the automatic detection
856doesn't work for you, or you don't edit Progress at all, use this in your
857startup vimrc: >
858 :let filetype_i = "asm"
859Replace "asm" with the type of assembly you use.
860
861There are many types of assembly languages that all use the same file name
862extensions. Therefore you will have to select the type yourself, or add a
863line in the assembly file that Vim will recognize. Currently these syntax
864files are included:
865 asm GNU assembly (the default)
866 asm68k Motorola 680x0 assembly
867 asmh8300 Hitachi H-8300 version of GNU assembly
868 ia64 Intel Itanium 64
869 fasm Flat assembly (http://flatassembler.net)
870 masm Microsoft assembly (probably works for any 80x86)
871 nasm Netwide assembly
872 tasm Turbo Assembly (with opcodes 80x86 up to Pentium, and
873 MMX)
874 pic PIC assembly (currently for PIC16F84)
875
876The most flexible is to add a line in your assembly file containing: >
Bram Moolenaar8f3f58f2010-01-06 20:52:26 +0100877 asmsyntax=nasm
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000878Replace "nasm" with the name of the real assembly syntax. This line must be
Bram Moolenaar8f3f58f2010-01-06 20:52:26 +0100879one of the first five lines in the file. No non-white text must be
Bram Moolenaar30b65812012-07-12 22:01:11 +0200880immediately before or after this text. Note that specifying asmsyntax=foo is
881equivalent to setting ft=foo in a |modeline|, and that in case of a conflict
882between the two settings the one from the modeline will take precedence (in
883particular, if you have ft=asm in the modeline, you will get the GNU syntax
884highlighting regardless of what is specified as asmsyntax).
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000885
886The syntax type can always be overruled for a specific buffer by setting the
887b:asmsyntax variable: >
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +0000888 :let b:asmsyntax = "nasm"
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000889
890If b:asmsyntax is not set, either automatically or by hand, then the value of
891the global variable asmsyntax is used. This can be seen as a default assembly
892language: >
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +0000893 :let asmsyntax = "nasm"
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000894
895As a last resort, if nothing is defined, the "asm" syntax is used.
896
897
898Netwide assembler (nasm.vim) optional highlighting ~
899
900To enable a feature: >
901 :let {variable}=1|set syntax=nasm
902To disable a feature: >
903 :unlet {variable} |set syntax=nasm
904
905Variable Highlight ~
906nasm_loose_syntax unofficial parser allowed syntax not as Error
907 (parser dependent; not recommended)
908nasm_ctx_outside_macro contexts outside macro not as Error
909nasm_no_warn potentially risky syntax not as ToDo
910
911
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000912ASPPERL and ASPVBS *ft-aspperl-syntax* *ft-aspvbs-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000913
914*.asp and *.asa files could be either Perl or Visual Basic script. Since it's
915hard to detect this you can set two global variables to tell Vim what you are
916using. For Perl script use: >
917 :let g:filetype_asa = "aspperl"
918 :let g:filetype_asp = "aspperl"
919For Visual Basic use: >
920 :let g:filetype_asa = "aspvbs"
921 :let g:filetype_asp = "aspvbs"
922
923
Bram Moolenaarc9b4b052006-04-30 18:54:39 +0000924BAAN *baan.vim* *baan-syntax*
Bram Moolenaarf193fff2006-04-27 00:02:13 +0000925
926The baan.vim gives syntax support for BaanC of release BaanIV upto SSA ERP LN
927for both 3 GL and 4 GL programming. Large number of standard defines/constants
928are supported.
929
930Some special violation of coding standards will be signalled when one specify
931in ones |.vimrc|: >
932 let baan_code_stds=1
933
934*baan-folding*
935
936Syntax folding can be enabled at various levels through the variables
937mentioned below (Set those in your |.vimrc|). The more complex folding on
938source blocks and SQL can be CPU intensive.
939
940To allow any folding and enable folding at function level use: >
941 let baan_fold=1
942Folding can be enabled at source block level as if, while, for ,... The
943indentation preceding the begin/end keywords has to match (spaces are not
944considered equal to a tab). >
945 let baan_fold_block=1
946Folding can be enabled for embedded SQL blocks as SELECT, SELECTDO,
Bram Moolenaarc9b4b052006-04-30 18:54:39 +0000947SELECTEMPTY, ... The indentation preceding the begin/end keywords has to
Bram Moolenaarf193fff2006-04-27 00:02:13 +0000948match (spaces are not considered equal to a tab). >
949 let baan_fold_sql=1
Bram Moolenaarc9b4b052006-04-30 18:54:39 +0000950Note: Block folding can result in many small folds. It is suggested to |:set|
Bram Moolenaarf193fff2006-04-27 00:02:13 +0000951the options 'foldminlines' and 'foldnestmax' in |.vimrc| or use |:setlocal| in
952.../after/syntax/baan.vim (see |after-directory|). Eg: >
953 set foldminlines=5
954 set foldnestmax=6
955
956
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000957BASIC *basic.vim* *vb.vim* *ft-basic-syntax* *ft-vb-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000958
959Both Visual Basic and "normal" basic use the extension ".bas". To detect
960which one should be used, Vim checks for the string "VB_Name" in the first
961five lines of the file. If it is not found, filetype will be "basic",
962otherwise "vb". Files with the ".frm" extension will always be seen as Visual
963Basic.
964
965
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000966C *c.vim* *ft-c-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000967
968A few things in C highlighting are optional. To enable them assign any value
969to the respective variable. Example: >
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +0000970 :let c_comment_strings = 1
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000971To disable them use ":unlet". Example: >
972 :unlet c_comment_strings
973
Bram Moolenaarba3ff532018-11-04 14:45:49 +0100974An alternative is to switch to the C++ highlighting: >
975 :set filetype=cpp
976
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000977Variable Highlight ~
Bram Moolenaar03413f42016-04-12 21:07:15 +0200978*c_gnu* GNU gcc specific items
979*c_comment_strings* strings and numbers inside a comment
980*c_space_errors* trailing white space and spaces before a <Tab>
981*c_no_trail_space_error* ... but no trailing spaces
982*c_no_tab_space_error* ... but no spaces before a <Tab>
983*c_no_bracket_error* don't highlight {}; inside [] as errors
984*c_no_curly_error* don't highlight {}; inside [] and () as errors;
Bram Moolenaar677ee682005-01-27 14:41:15 +0000985 except { and } in first column
Bram Moolenaar09521312016-08-12 22:54:35 +0200986 Default is to highlight them, otherwise you
987 can't spot a missing ")".
Bram Moolenaar03413f42016-04-12 21:07:15 +0200988*c_curly_error* highlight a missing }; this forces syncing from the
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +0000989 start of the file, can be slow
Bram Moolenaar03413f42016-04-12 21:07:15 +0200990*c_no_ansi* don't do standard ANSI types and constants
991*c_ansi_typedefs* ... but do standard ANSI types
992*c_ansi_constants* ... but do standard ANSI constants
993*c_no_utf* don't highlight \u and \U in strings
994*c_syntax_for_h* for *.h files use C syntax instead of C++ and use objc
Bram Moolenaar61d35bd2012-03-28 20:51:51 +0200995 syntax instead of objcpp
Bram Moolenaar03413f42016-04-12 21:07:15 +0200996*c_no_if0* don't highlight "#if 0" blocks as comments
997*c_no_cformat* don't highlight %-formats in strings
998*c_no_c99* don't highlight C99 standard items
999*c_no_c11* don't highlight C11 standard items
1000*c_no_bsd* don't highlight BSD specific types
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001001
Bram Moolenaar293ee4d2004-12-09 21:34:53 +00001002When 'foldmethod' is set to "syntax" then /* */ comments and { } blocks will
1003become a fold. If you don't want comments to become a fold use: >
1004 :let c_no_comment_fold = 1
Bram Moolenaarf9393ef2006-04-24 19:47:27 +00001005"#if 0" blocks are also folded, unless: >
1006 :let c_no_if0_fold = 1
Bram Moolenaar293ee4d2004-12-09 21:34:53 +00001007
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001008If you notice highlighting errors while scrolling backwards, which are fixed
1009when redrawing with CTRL-L, try setting the "c_minlines" internal variable
1010to a larger number: >
1011 :let c_minlines = 100
1012This will make the syntax synchronization start 100 lines before the first
1013displayed line. The default value is 50 (15 when c_no_if0 is set). The
1014disadvantage of using a larger number is that redrawing can become slow.
1015
1016When using the "#if 0" / "#endif" comment highlighting, notice that this only
1017works when the "#if 0" is within "c_minlines" from the top of the window. If
1018you have a long "#if 0" construct it will not be highlighted correctly.
1019
1020To match extra items in comments, use the cCommentGroup cluster.
1021Example: >
1022 :au Syntax c call MyCadd()
1023 :function MyCadd()
1024 : syn keyword cMyItem contained Ni
1025 : syn cluster cCommentGroup add=cMyItem
1026 : hi link cMyItem Title
1027 :endfun
1028
1029ANSI constants will be highlighted with the "cConstant" group. This includes
1030"NULL", "SIG_IGN" and others. But not "TRUE", for example, because this is
1031not in the ANSI standard. If you find this confusing, remove the cConstant
1032highlighting: >
1033 :hi link cConstant NONE
1034
1035If you see '{' and '}' highlighted as an error where they are OK, reset the
1036highlighting for cErrInParen and cErrInBracket.
1037
1038If you want to use folding in your C files, you can add these lines in a file
Bram Moolenaar06b5d512010-05-22 15:37:44 +02001039in the "after" directory in 'runtimepath'. For Unix this would be
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001040~/.vim/after/syntax/c.vim. >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001041 syn sync fromstart
1042 set foldmethod=syntax
1043
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001044CH *ch.vim* *ft-ch-syntax*
Bram Moolenaard4755bb2004-09-02 19:12:26 +00001045
1046C/C++ interpreter. Ch has similar syntax highlighting to C and builds upon
1047the C syntax file. See |c.vim| for all the settings that are available for C.
1048
1049By setting a variable you can tell Vim to use Ch syntax for *.h files, instead
1050of C or C++: >
1051 :let ch_syntax_for_h = 1
1052
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001053
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001054CHILL *chill.vim* *ft-chill-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001055
1056Chill syntax highlighting is similar to C. See |c.vim| for all the settings
1057that are available. Additionally there is:
1058
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001059chill_space_errors like c_space_errors
1060chill_comment_string like c_comment_strings
1061chill_minlines like c_minlines
1062
1063
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001064CHANGELOG *changelog.vim* *ft-changelog-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001065
1066ChangeLog supports highlighting spaces at the start of a line.
1067If you do not like this, add following line to your .vimrc: >
1068 let g:changelog_spacing_errors = 0
1069This works the next time you edit a changelog file. You can also use
1070"b:changelog_spacing_errors" to set this per buffer (before loading the syntax
1071file).
1072
1073You can change the highlighting used, e.g., to flag the spaces as an error: >
1074 :hi link ChangelogError Error
1075Or to avoid the highlighting: >
1076 :hi link ChangelogError NONE
1077This works immediately.
1078
1079
Bram Moolenaar76f3b1a2014-03-27 22:30:07 +01001080CLOJURE *ft-clojure-syntax*
1081
Bram Moolenaar6f1d9a02016-07-24 14:12:38 +02001082The default syntax groups can be augmented through the
1083*g:clojure_syntax_keywords* and *b:clojure_syntax_keywords* variables. The
1084value should be a |Dictionary| of syntax group names to a |List| of custom
1085identifiers:
1086>
1087 let g:clojure_syntax_keywords = {
1088 \ 'clojureMacro': ["defproject", "defcustom"],
1089 \ 'clojureFunc': ["string/join", "string/replace"]
1090 \ }
1091<
1092Refer to the Clojure syntax script for valid syntax group names.
1093
1094If the |buffer-variable| *b:clojure_syntax_without_core_keywords* is set, only
1095language constants and special forms are matched.
1096
Bram Moolenaar76f3b1a2014-03-27 22:30:07 +01001097Setting *g:clojure_fold* enables folding Clojure code via the syntax engine.
1098Any list, vector, or map that extends over more than one line can be folded
1099using the standard Vim |fold-commands|.
1100
1101Please note that this option does not work with scripts that redefine the
1102bracket syntax regions, such as rainbow-parentheses plugins.
1103
1104This option is off by default.
1105>
1106 " Default
1107 let g:clojure_fold = 0
1108<
1109
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001110COBOL *cobol.vim* *ft-cobol-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001111
1112COBOL highlighting has different needs for legacy code than it does for fresh
1113development. This is due to differences in what is being done (maintenance
1114versus development) and other factors. To enable legacy code highlighting,
1115add this line to your .vimrc: >
1116 :let cobol_legacy_code = 1
1117To disable it again, use this: >
1118 :unlet cobol_legacy_code
1119
1120
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001121COLD FUSION *coldfusion.vim* *ft-coldfusion-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001122
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001123The ColdFusion has its own version of HTML comments. To turn on ColdFusion
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001124comment highlighting, add the following line to your startup file: >
1125
1126 :let html_wrong_comments = 1
1127
1128The ColdFusion syntax file is based on the HTML syntax file.
1129
1130
Bram Moolenaar34700a62013-03-07 13:20:54 +01001131CPP *cpp.vim* *ft-cpp-syntax*
1132
1133Most of things are same as |ft-c-syntax|.
1134
1135Variable Highlight ~
Bram Moolenaara0f849e2015-10-30 14:37:44 +01001136cpp_no_cpp11 don't highlight C++11 standard items
Bram Moolenaarb4ff5182015-11-10 21:15:48 +01001137cpp_no_cpp14 don't highlight C++14 standard items
Bram Moolenaar34700a62013-03-07 13:20:54 +01001138
1139
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001140CSH *csh.vim* *ft-csh-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001141
1142This covers the shell named "csh". Note that on some systems tcsh is actually
1143used.
1144
1145Detecting whether a file is csh or tcsh is notoriously hard. Some systems
1146symlink /bin/csh to /bin/tcsh, making it almost impossible to distinguish
1147between csh and tcsh. In case VIM guesses wrong you can set the
Bram Moolenaar97293012011-07-18 19:40:27 +02001148"filetype_csh" variable. For using csh: *g:filetype_csh*
1149>
1150 :let g:filetype_csh = "csh"
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001151
1152For using tcsh: >
1153
Bram Moolenaar97293012011-07-18 19:40:27 +02001154 :let g:filetype_csh = "tcsh"
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001155
1156Any script with a tcsh extension or a standard tcsh filename (.tcshrc,
1157tcsh.tcshrc, tcsh.login) will have filetype tcsh. All other tcsh/csh scripts
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001158will be classified as tcsh, UNLESS the "filetype_csh" variable exists. If the
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001159"filetype_csh" variable exists, the filetype will be set to the value of the
1160variable.
1161
1162
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001163CYNLIB *cynlib.vim* *ft-cynlib-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001164
1165Cynlib files are C++ files that use the Cynlib class library to enable
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001166hardware modelling and simulation using C++. Typically Cynlib files have a .cc
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001167or a .cpp extension, which makes it very difficult to distinguish them from a
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001168normal C++ file. Thus, to enable Cynlib highlighting for .cc files, add this
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001169line to your .vimrc file: >
1170
1171 :let cynlib_cyntax_for_cc=1
1172
1173Similarly for cpp files (this extension is only usually used in Windows) >
1174
1175 :let cynlib_cyntax_for_cpp=1
1176
1177To disable these again, use this: >
1178
1179 :unlet cynlib_cyntax_for_cc
1180 :unlet cynlib_cyntax_for_cpp
1181<
1182
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001183CWEB *cweb.vim* *ft-cweb-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001184
1185Files matching "*.w" could be Progress or cweb. If the automatic detection
1186doesn't work for you, or you don't edit Progress at all, use this in your
1187startup vimrc: >
1188 :let filetype_w = "cweb"
1189
1190
Bram Moolenaar96f45c02019-10-26 19:53:45 +02001191DART *dart.vim* *ft-dart-syntax*
1192
1193Dart is an object-oriented, typed, class defined, garbage collected language
1194used for developing mobile, desktop, web, and back-end applications. Dart uses
1195a C-like syntax derived from C, Java, and JavaScript, with features adopted
1196from Smalltalk, Python, Ruby, and others.
1197
1198More information about the language and its development environment at the
1199official Dart language website at https://dart.dev
1200
1201dart.vim syntax detects and highlights Dart statements, reserved words,
1202type declarations, storage classes, conditionals, loops, interpolated values,
1203and comments. There is no support idioms from Flutter or any other Dart
1204framework.
1205
1206Changes, fixes? Submit an issue or pull request via:
1207
1208https://github.com/pr3d4t0r/dart-vim-syntax/
1209
1210
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001211DESKTOP *desktop.vim* *ft-desktop-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001212
1213Primary goal of this syntax file is to highlight .desktop and .directory files
Bram Moolenaara17d4c12010-05-30 18:30:36 +02001214according to freedesktop.org standard:
1215http://standards.freedesktop.org/desktop-entry-spec/latest/
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001216But actually almost none implements this standard fully. Thus it will
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001217highlight all Unix ini files. But you can force strict highlighting according
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001218to standard by placing this in your vimrc file: >
1219 :let enforce_freedesktop_standard = 1
1220
1221
Bram Moolenaar8feef4f2015-01-07 16:57:10 +01001222DIFF *diff.vim*
1223
1224The diff highlighting normally finds translated headers. This can be slow if
1225there are very long lines in the file. To disable translations: >
1226
1227 :let diff_translations = 0
1228
Bram Moolenaar0122c402015-02-03 19:13:34 +01001229Also see |diff-slow|.
1230
Bram Moolenaar8feef4f2015-01-07 16:57:10 +01001231
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001232DIRCOLORS *dircolors.vim* *ft-dircolors-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001233
1234The dircolors utility highlighting definition has one option. It exists to
1235provide compatibility with the Slackware GNU/Linux distributions version of
1236the command. It adds a few keywords that are generally ignored by most
1237versions. On Slackware systems, however, the utility accepts the keywords and
1238uses them for processing. To enable the Slackware keywords add the following
1239line to your startup file: >
1240 let dircolors_is_slackware = 1
1241
1242
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001243DOCBOOK *docbk.vim* *ft-docbk-syntax* *docbook*
Bram Moolenaar81af9252010-12-10 20:35:50 +01001244DOCBOOK XML *docbkxml.vim* *ft-docbkxml-syntax*
1245DOCBOOK SGML *docbksgml.vim* *ft-docbksgml-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001246
1247There are two types of DocBook files: SGML and XML. To specify what type you
1248are using the "b:docbk_type" variable should be set. Vim does this for you
1249automatically if it can recognize the type. When Vim can't guess it the type
1250defaults to XML.
1251You can set the type manually: >
1252 :let docbk_type = "sgml"
1253or: >
1254 :let docbk_type = "xml"
1255You need to do this before loading the syntax file, which is complicated.
1256Simpler is setting the filetype to "docbkxml" or "docbksgml": >
1257 :set filetype=docbksgml
1258or: >
1259 :set filetype=docbkxml
1260
Bram Moolenaar2df58b42012-11-28 18:21:11 +01001261You can specify the DocBook version: >
1262 :let docbk_ver = 3
1263When not set 4 is used.
1264
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001265
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001266DOSBATCH *dosbatch.vim* *ft-dosbatch-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001267
1268There is one option with highlighting DOS batch files. This covers new
1269extensions to the Command Interpreter introduced with Windows 2000 and
1270is controlled by the variable dosbatch_cmdextversion. For Windows NT
1271this should have the value 1, and for Windows 2000 it should be 2.
1272Select the version you want with the following line: >
1273
Bram Moolenaar8299df92004-07-10 09:47:34 +00001274 :let dosbatch_cmdextversion = 1
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001275
1276If this variable is not defined it defaults to a value of 2 to support
1277Windows 2000.
1278
Bram Moolenaar8299df92004-07-10 09:47:34 +00001279A second option covers whether *.btm files should be detected as type
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001280"dosbatch" (MS-DOS batch files) or type "btm" (4DOS batch files). The latter
1281is used by default. You may select the former with the following line: >
Bram Moolenaar8299df92004-07-10 09:47:34 +00001282
1283 :let g:dosbatch_syntax_for_btm = 1
1284
1285If this variable is undefined or zero, btm syntax is selected.
1286
1287
Bram Moolenaar8cacf352006-04-15 20:27:24 +00001288DOXYGEN *doxygen.vim* *doxygen-syntax*
1289
1290Doxygen generates code documentation using a special documentation format
Bram Moolenaare37d50a2008-08-06 17:06:04 +00001291(similar to Javadoc). This syntax script adds doxygen highlighting to c, cpp,
1292idl and php files, and should also work with java.
Bram Moolenaar8cacf352006-04-15 20:27:24 +00001293
Bram Moolenaar25394022007-05-10 19:06:20 +00001294There are a few of ways to turn on doxygen formatting. It can be done
1295explicitly or in a modeline by appending '.doxygen' to the syntax of the file.
1296Example: >
Bram Moolenaar8cacf352006-04-15 20:27:24 +00001297 :set syntax=c.doxygen
1298or >
1299 // vim:syntax=c.doxygen
1300
Bram Moolenaar5dc62522012-02-13 00:05:22 +01001301It can also be done automatically for C, C++, C#, IDL and PHP files by setting
1302the global or buffer-local variable load_doxygen_syntax. This is done by
1303adding the following to your .vimrc. >
Bram Moolenaar8cacf352006-04-15 20:27:24 +00001304 :let g:load_doxygen_syntax=1
1305
Bram Moolenaar06b5d512010-05-22 15:37:44 +02001306There are a couple of variables that have an effect on syntax highlighting, and
Bram Moolenaar8cacf352006-04-15 20:27:24 +00001307are to do with non-standard highlighting options.
1308
1309Variable Default Effect ~
1310g:doxygen_enhanced_color
1311g:doxygen_enhanced_colour 0 Use non-standard highlighting for
1312 doxygen comments.
1313
1314doxygen_my_rendering 0 Disable rendering of HTML bold, italic
1315 and html_my_rendering underline.
1316
1317doxygen_javadoc_autobrief 1 Set to 0 to disable javadoc autobrief
1318 colour highlighting.
1319
1320doxygen_end_punctuation '[.]' Set to regexp match for the ending
Bram Moolenaarc9b4b052006-04-30 18:54:39 +00001321 punctuation of brief
Bram Moolenaar8cacf352006-04-15 20:27:24 +00001322
Bram Moolenaarfc65cab2018-08-28 22:58:02 +02001323There are also some highlight groups worth mentioning as they can be useful in
Bram Moolenaar8cacf352006-04-15 20:27:24 +00001324configuration.
1325
1326Highlight Effect ~
1327doxygenErrorComment The colour of an end-comment when missing
1328 punctuation in a code, verbatim or dot section
1329doxygenLinkError The colour of an end-comment when missing the
1330 \endlink from a \link section.
1331
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001332
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001333DTD *dtd.vim* *ft-dtd-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001334
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001335The DTD syntax highlighting is case sensitive by default. To disable
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001336case-sensitive highlighting, add the following line to your startup file: >
1337
1338 :let dtd_ignore_case=1
1339
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001340The DTD syntax file will highlight unknown tags as errors. If
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001341this is annoying, it can be turned off by setting: >
1342
1343 :let dtd_no_tag_errors=1
1344
1345before sourcing the dtd.vim syntax file.
1346Parameter entity names are highlighted in the definition using the
1347'Type' highlighting group and 'Comment' for punctuation and '%'.
1348Parameter entity instances are highlighted using the 'Constant'
1349highlighting group and the 'Type' highlighting group for the
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001350delimiters % and ;. This can be turned off by setting: >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001351
1352 :let dtd_no_param_entities=1
1353
1354The DTD syntax file is also included by xml.vim to highlight included dtd's.
1355
1356
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001357EIFFEL *eiffel.vim* *ft-eiffel-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001358
1359While Eiffel is not case-sensitive, its style guidelines are, and the
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001360syntax highlighting file encourages their use. This also allows to
1361highlight class names differently. If you want to disable case-sensitive
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001362highlighting, add the following line to your startup file: >
1363
1364 :let eiffel_ignore_case=1
1365
1366Case still matters for class names and TODO marks in comments.
1367
1368Conversely, for even stricter checks, add one of the following lines: >
1369
1370 :let eiffel_strict=1
1371 :let eiffel_pedantic=1
1372
1373Setting eiffel_strict will only catch improper capitalization for the
1374five predefined words "Current", "Void", "Result", "Precursor", and
1375"NONE", to warn against their accidental use as feature or class names.
1376
1377Setting eiffel_pedantic will enforce adherence to the Eiffel style
1378guidelines fairly rigorously (like arbitrary mixes of upper- and
1379lowercase letters as well as outdated ways to capitalize keywords).
1380
1381If you want to use the lower-case version of "Current", "Void",
1382"Result", and "Precursor", you can use >
1383
1384 :let eiffel_lower_case_predef=1
1385
1386instead of completely turning case-sensitive highlighting off.
1387
1388Support for ISE's proposed new creation syntax that is already
1389experimentally handled by some compilers can be enabled by: >
1390
1391 :let eiffel_ise=1
1392
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001393Finally, some vendors support hexadecimal constants. To handle them, add >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001394
1395 :let eiffel_hex_constants=1
1396
1397to your startup file.
1398
1399
Bram Moolenaar08589172014-03-08 18:38:28 +01001400EUPHORIA *euphoria3.vim* *euphoria4.vim* *ft-euphoria-syntax*
1401
1402Two syntax highlighting files exists for Euphoria. One for Euphoria
1403version 3.1.1, which is the default syntax highlighting file, and one for
1404Euphoria version 4.0.5 or later.
1405
1406Euphoria version 3.1.1 (http://www.rapideuphoria.com/) is still necessary
1407for developing applications for the DOS platform, which Euphoria version 4
1408(http://www.openeuphoria.org/) does not support.
1409
1410The following file extensions are auto-detected as Euphoria file type:
1411
1412 *.e, *.eu, *.ew, *.ex, *.exu, *.exw
1413 *.E, *.EU, *.EW, *.EX, *.EXU, *.EXW
1414
1415To select syntax highlighting file for Euphoria, as well as for
1416auto-detecting the *.e and *.E file extensions as Euphoria file type,
1417add the following line to your startup file: >
1418
1419 :let filetype_euphoria="euphoria3"
1420
1421 or
1422
1423 :let filetype_euphoria="euphoria4"
1424
1425
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001426ERLANG *erlang.vim* *ft-erlang-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001427
Bram Moolenaarad3b3662013-05-17 18:14:19 +02001428Erlang is a functional programming language developed by Ericsson. Files with
Bram Moolenaar543b7ef2013-06-01 14:50:56 +02001429the following extensions are recognized as Erlang files: erl, hrl, yaws.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001430
Bram Moolenaarad3b3662013-05-17 18:14:19 +02001431The BIFs (built-in functions) are highlighted by default. To disable this,
1432put the following line in your vimrc: >
1433
1434 :let g:erlang_highlight_bifs = 0
1435
1436To enable highlighting some special atoms, put this in your vimrc: >
1437
1438 :let g:erlang_highlight_special_atoms = 1
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001439
1440
Bram Moolenaard68071d2006-05-02 22:08:30 +00001441FLEXWIKI *flexwiki.vim* *ft-flexwiki-syntax*
1442
1443FlexWiki is an ASP.NET-based wiki package available at http://www.flexwiki.com
Bram Moolenaar446beb42011-05-10 17:18:44 +02001444NOTE: this site currently doesn't work, on Wikipedia is mentioned that
1445development stopped in 2009.
Bram Moolenaard68071d2006-05-02 22:08:30 +00001446
1447Syntax highlighting is available for the most common elements of FlexWiki
1448syntax. The associated ftplugin script sets some buffer-local options to make
1449editing FlexWiki pages more convenient. FlexWiki considers a newline as the
1450start of a new paragraph, so the ftplugin sets 'tw'=0 (unlimited line length),
1451'wrap' (wrap long lines instead of using horizontal scrolling), 'linebreak'
1452(to wrap at a character in 'breakat' instead of at the last char on screen),
1453and so on. It also includes some keymaps that are disabled by default.
1454
1455If you want to enable the keymaps that make "j" and "k" and the cursor keys
1456move up and down by display lines, add this to your .vimrc: >
1457 :let flexwiki_maps = 1
1458
1459
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001460FORM *form.vim* *ft-form-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001461
1462The coloring scheme for syntax elements in the FORM file uses the default
1463modes Conditional, Number, Statement, Comment, PreProc, Type, and String,
Bram Moolenaardd2a0d82007-05-12 15:07:00 +00001464following the language specifications in 'Symbolic Manipulation with FORM' by
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001465J.A.M. Vermaseren, CAN, Netherlands, 1991.
1466
1467If you want include your own changes to the default colors, you have to
1468redefine the following syntax groups:
1469
1470 - formConditional
1471 - formNumber
1472 - formStatement
1473 - formHeaderStatement
1474 - formComment
1475 - formPreProc
1476 - formDirective
1477 - formType
1478 - formString
1479
1480Note that the form.vim syntax file implements FORM preprocessor commands and
1481directives per default in the same syntax group.
1482
1483A predefined enhanced color mode for FORM is available to distinguish between
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001484header statements and statements in the body of a FORM program. To activate
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001485this mode define the following variable in your vimrc file >
1486
1487 :let form_enhanced_color=1
1488
1489The enhanced mode also takes advantage of additional color features for a dark
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001490gvim display. Here, statements are colored LightYellow instead of Yellow, and
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001491conditionals are LightBlue for better distinction.
1492
1493
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001494FORTRAN *fortran.vim* *ft-fortran-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001495
1496Default highlighting and dialect ~
Bram Moolenaar6ee8d892012-01-10 14:55:01 +01001497Highlighting appropriate for Fortran 2008 is used by default. This choice
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02001498should be appropriate for most users most of the time because Fortran 2008 is
1499almost a superset of previous versions (Fortran 2003, 95, 90, and 77).
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001500
1501Fortran source code form ~
Bram Moolenaar6be7f872012-01-20 21:08:56 +01001502Fortran code can be in either fixed or free source form. Note that the
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001503syntax highlighting will not be correct if the form is incorrectly set.
1504
1505When you create a new fortran file, the syntax script assumes fixed source
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001506form. If you always use free source form, then >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001507 :let fortran_free_source=1
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001508in your .vimrc prior to the :syntax on command. If you always use fixed source
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001509form, then >
1510 :let fortran_fixed_source=1
1511in your .vimrc prior to the :syntax on command.
1512
Bram Moolenaar256972a2015-12-29 19:10:25 +01001513If the form of the source code depends, in a non-standard way, upon the file
1514extension, then it is most convenient to set fortran_free_source in a ftplugin
1515file. For more information on ftplugin files, see |ftplugin|. Note that this
1516will work only if the "filetype plugin indent on" command precedes the "syntax
1517on" command in your .vimrc file.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001518
1519When you edit an existing fortran file, the syntax script will assume free
1520source form if the fortran_free_source variable has been set, and assumes
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001521fixed source form if the fortran_fixed_source variable has been set. If
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001522neither of these variables have been set, the syntax script attempts to
Bram Moolenaar256972a2015-12-29 19:10:25 +01001523determine which source form has been used by examining the file extension
1524using conventions common to the ifort, gfortran, Cray, NAG, and PathScale
1525compilers (.f, .for, .f77 for fixed-source, .f90, .f95, .f03, .f08 for
1526free-source). If none of this works, then the script examines the first five
1527columns of the first 500 lines of your file. If no signs of free source form
1528are detected, then the file is assumed to be in fixed source form. The
1529algorithm should work in the vast majority of cases. In some cases, such as a
1530file that begins with 500 or more full-line comments, the script may
1531incorrectly decide that the fortran code is in fixed form. If that happens,
1532just add a non-comment statement beginning anywhere in the first five columns
Bram Moolenaar3df01732017-02-17 22:47:16 +01001533of the first twenty-five lines, save (:w) and then reload (:e!) the file.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001534
1535Tabs in fortran files ~
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001536Tabs are not recognized by the Fortran standards. Tabs are not a good idea in
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001537fixed format fortran source code which requires fixed column boundaries.
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001538Therefore, tabs are marked as errors. Nevertheless, some programmers like
1539using tabs. If your fortran files contain tabs, then you should set the
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001540variable fortran_have_tabs in your .vimrc with a command such as >
1541 :let fortran_have_tabs=1
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001542placed prior to the :syntax on command. Unfortunately, the use of tabs will
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001543mean that the syntax file will not be able to detect incorrect margins.
1544
1545Syntax folding of fortran files ~
1546If you wish to use foldmethod=syntax, then you must first set the variable
1547fortran_fold with a command such as >
1548 :let fortran_fold=1
1549to instruct the syntax script to define fold regions for program units, that
1550is main programs starting with a program statement, subroutines, function
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001551subprograms, block data subprograms, interface blocks, and modules. If you
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001552also set the variable fortran_fold_conditionals with a command such as >
1553 :let fortran_fold_conditionals=1
1554then fold regions will also be defined for do loops, if blocks, and select
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001555case constructs. If you also set the variable
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001556fortran_fold_multilinecomments with a command such as >
1557 :let fortran_fold_multilinecomments=1
1558then fold regions will also be defined for three or more consecutive comment
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001559lines. Note that defining fold regions can be slow for large files.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001560
1561If fortran_fold, and possibly fortran_fold_conditionals and/or
1562fortran_fold_multilinecomments, have been set, then vim will fold your file if
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001563you set foldmethod=syntax. Comments or blank lines placed between two program
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001564units are not folded because they are seen as not belonging to any program
1565unit.
1566
1567More precise fortran syntax ~
1568If you set the variable fortran_more_precise with a command such as >
1569 :let fortran_more_precise=1
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001570then the syntax coloring will be more precise but slower. In particular,
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001571statement labels used in do, goto and arithmetic if statements will be
1572recognized, as will construct names at the end of a do, if, select or forall
1573construct.
1574
1575Non-default fortran dialects ~
Bram Moolenaar6be7f872012-01-20 21:08:56 +01001576The syntax script supports two Fortran dialects: f08 and F. You will probably
1577find the default highlighting (f08) satisfactory. A few legacy constructs
1578deleted or declared obsolescent in the 2008 standard are highlighted as todo
1579items.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001580
Bram Moolenaar6be7f872012-01-20 21:08:56 +01001581If you use F, the advantage of setting the dialect appropriately is that
1582other legacy features excluded from F will be highlighted as todo items and
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02001583that free source form will be assumed.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001584
Bram Moolenaar6be7f872012-01-20 21:08:56 +01001585The dialect can be selected in various ways. If all your fortran files use
1586the same dialect, set the global variable fortran_dialect in your .vimrc prior
1587to your syntax on statement. The case-sensitive, permissible values of
1588fortran_dialect are "f08" or "F". Invalid values of fortran_dialect are
1589ignored.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001590
Bram Moolenaar6be7f872012-01-20 21:08:56 +01001591If the dialect depends upon the file extension, then it is most convenient to
1592set a buffer-local variable in a ftplugin file. For more information on
1593ftplugin files, see |ftplugin|. For example, if all your fortran files with
1594an .f90 extension are written in the F subset, your ftplugin file should
1595contain the code >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001596 let s:extfname = expand("%:e")
1597 if s:extfname ==? "f90"
Bram Moolenaar6be7f872012-01-20 21:08:56 +01001598 let b:fortran_dialect="F"
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001599 else
Bram Moolenaar6be7f872012-01-20 21:08:56 +01001600 unlet! b:fortran_dialect
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001601 endif
1602Note that this will work only if the "filetype plugin indent on" command
1603precedes the "syntax on" command in your .vimrc file.
1604
1605Finer control is necessary if the file extension does not uniquely identify
Bram Moolenaar6be7f872012-01-20 21:08:56 +01001606the dialect. You can override the default dialect, on a file-by-file basis,
1607by including a comment with the directive "fortran_dialect=xx" (where xx=F or
1608f08) in one of the first three lines in your file. For example, your older .f
1609files may be legacy code but your newer ones may be F codes, and you would
1610identify the latter by including in the first three lines of those files a
1611Fortran comment of the form >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001612 ! fortran_dialect=F
Bram Moolenaar6be7f872012-01-20 21:08:56 +01001613
1614For previous versions of the syntax, you may have set fortran_dialect to the
1615now-obsolete values "f77", "f90", "f95", or "elf". Such settings will be
1616silently handled as "f08". Users of "elf" may wish to experiment with "F"
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02001617instead.
Bram Moolenaar6be7f872012-01-20 21:08:56 +01001618
1619The syntax/fortran.vim script contains embedded comments that tell you how to
1620comment and/or uncomment some lines to (a) activate recognition of some
1621non-standard, vendor-supplied intrinsics and (b) to prevent features deleted
1622or declared obsolescent in the 2008 standard from being highlighted as todo
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02001623items.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001624
1625Limitations ~
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001626Parenthesis checking does not catch too few closing parentheses. Hollerith
1627strings are not recognized. Some keywords may be highlighted incorrectly
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001628because Fortran90 has no reserved words.
1629
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001630For further information related to fortran, see |ft-fortran-indent| and
1631|ft-fortran-plugin|.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001632
1633
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001634FVWM CONFIGURATION FILES *fvwm.vim* *ft-fvwm-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001635
1636In order for Vim to recognize Fvwm configuration files that do not match
1637the patterns *fvwmrc* or *fvwm2rc* , you must put additional patterns
1638appropriate to your system in your myfiletypes.vim file. For these
1639patterns, you must set the variable "b:fvwm_version" to the major version
1640number of Fvwm, and the 'filetype' option to fvwm.
1641
1642For example, to make Vim identify all files in /etc/X11/fvwm2/
1643as Fvwm2 configuration files, add the following: >
1644
1645 :au! BufNewFile,BufRead /etc/X11/fvwm2/* let b:fvwm_version = 2 |
1646 \ set filetype=fvwm
1647
1648If you'd like Vim to highlight all valid color names, tell it where to
1649find the color database (rgb.txt) on your system. Do this by setting
1650"rgb_file" to its location. Assuming your color database is located
1651in /usr/X11/lib/X11/, you should add the line >
1652
1653 :let rgb_file = "/usr/X11/lib/X11/rgb.txt"
1654
1655to your .vimrc file.
1656
1657
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001658GSP *gsp.vim* *ft-gsp-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001659
1660The default coloring style for GSP pages is defined by |html.vim|, and
1661the coloring for java code (within java tags or inline between backticks)
1662is defined by |java.vim|. The following HTML groups defined in |html.vim|
1663are redefined to incorporate and highlight inline java code:
1664
1665 htmlString
1666 htmlValue
1667 htmlEndTag
1668 htmlTag
1669 htmlTagN
1670
1671Highlighting should look fine most of the places where you'd see inline
1672java code, but in some special cases it may not. To add another HTML
1673group where you will have inline java code where it does not highlight
1674correctly, just copy the line you want from |html.vim| and add gspJava
1675to the contains clause.
1676
1677The backticks for inline java are highlighted according to the htmlError
1678group to make them easier to see.
1679
1680
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001681GROFF *groff.vim* *ft-groff-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001682
1683The groff syntax file is a wrapper for |nroff.vim|, see the notes
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001684under that heading for examples of use and configuration. The purpose
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001685of this wrapper is to set up groff syntax extensions by setting the
1686filetype from a |modeline| or in a personal filetype definitions file
1687(see |filetype.txt|).
1688
1689
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001690HASKELL *haskell.vim* *lhaskell.vim* *ft-haskell-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001691
1692The Haskell syntax files support plain Haskell code as well as literate
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001693Haskell code, the latter in both Bird style and TeX style. The Haskell
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001694syntax highlighting will also highlight C preprocessor directives.
1695
1696If you want to highlight delimiter characters (useful if you have a
1697light-coloured background), add to your .vimrc: >
1698 :let hs_highlight_delimiters = 1
1699To treat True and False as keywords as opposed to ordinary identifiers,
1700add: >
1701 :let hs_highlight_boolean = 1
1702To also treat the names of primitive types as keywords: >
1703 :let hs_highlight_types = 1
1704And to treat the names of even more relatively common types as keywords: >
1705 :let hs_highlight_more_types = 1
1706If you want to highlight the names of debugging functions, put in
1707your .vimrc: >
1708 :let hs_highlight_debug = 1
1709
1710The Haskell syntax highlighting also highlights C preprocessor
1711directives, and flags lines that start with # but are not valid
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001712directives as erroneous. This interferes with Haskell's syntax for
1713operators, as they may start with #. If you want to highlight those
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001714as operators as opposed to errors, put in your .vimrc: >
1715 :let hs_allow_hash_operator = 1
1716
1717The syntax highlighting for literate Haskell code will try to
1718automatically guess whether your literate Haskell code contains
1719TeX markup or not, and correspondingly highlight TeX constructs
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001720or nothing at all. You can override this globally by putting
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001721in your .vimrc >
1722 :let lhs_markup = none
1723for no highlighting at all, or >
1724 :let lhs_markup = tex
1725to force the highlighting to always try to highlight TeX markup.
1726For more flexibility, you may also use buffer local versions of
1727this variable, so e.g. >
1728 :let b:lhs_markup = tex
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001729will force TeX highlighting for a particular buffer. It has to be
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001730set before turning syntax highlighting on for the buffer or
1731loading a file.
1732
1733
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001734HTML *html.vim* *ft-html-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001735
1736The coloring scheme for tags in the HTML file works as follows.
1737
1738The <> of opening tags are colored differently than the </> of a closing tag.
1739This is on purpose! For opening tags the 'Function' color is used, while for
1740closing tags the 'Type' color is used (See syntax.vim to check how those are
1741defined for you)
1742
1743Known tag names are colored the same way as statements in C. Unknown tag
1744names are colored with the same color as the <> or </> respectively which
1745makes it easy to spot errors
1746
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001747Note that the same is true for argument (or attribute) names. Known attribute
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001748names are colored differently than unknown ones.
1749
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001750Some HTML tags are used to change the rendering of text. The following tags
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001751are recognized by the html.vim syntax coloring file and change the way normal
1752text is shown: <B> <I> <U> <EM> <STRONG> (<EM> is used as an alias for <I>,
1753while <STRONG> as an alias for <B>), <H1> - <H6>, <HEAD>, <TITLE> and <A>, but
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001754only if used as a link (that is, it must include a href as in
Bram Moolenaar25394022007-05-10 19:06:20 +00001755<A href="somefile.html">).
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001756
1757If you want to change how such text is rendered, you must redefine the
1758following syntax groups:
1759
1760 - htmlBold
1761 - htmlBoldUnderline
1762 - htmlBoldUnderlineItalic
1763 - htmlUnderline
1764 - htmlUnderlineItalic
1765 - htmlItalic
1766 - htmlTitle for titles
1767 - htmlH1 - htmlH6 for headings
1768
1769To make this redefinition work you must redefine them all with the exception
1770of the last two (htmlTitle and htmlH[1-6], which are optional) and define the
1771following variable in your vimrc (this is due to the order in which the files
1772are read during initialization) >
1773 :let html_my_rendering=1
1774
1775If you'd like to see an example download mysyntax.vim at
1776http://www.fleiner.com/vim/download.html
1777
1778You can also disable this rendering by adding the following line to your
1779vimrc file: >
1780 :let html_no_rendering=1
1781
1782HTML comments are rather special (see an HTML reference document for the
1783details), and the syntax coloring scheme will highlight all errors.
1784However, if you prefer to use the wrong style (starts with <!-- and
Bram Moolenaar8bb1c3e2014-07-04 16:43:17 +02001785ends with -->) you can define >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001786 :let html_wrong_comments=1
1787
1788JavaScript and Visual Basic embedded inside HTML documents are highlighted as
1789'Special' with statements, comments, strings and so on colored as in standard
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001790programming languages. Note that only JavaScript and Visual Basic are currently
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001791supported, no other scripting language has been added yet.
1792
1793Embedded and inlined cascading style sheets (CSS) are highlighted too.
1794
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001795There are several html preprocessor languages out there. html.vim has been
1796written such that it should be trivial to include it. To do so add the
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001797following two lines to the syntax coloring file for that language
1798(the example comes from the asp.vim file):
Bram Moolenaar30e9b3c2019-09-07 16:24:12 +02001799>
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001800 runtime! syntax/html.vim
1801 syn cluster htmlPreproc add=asp
1802
1803Now you just need to make sure that you add all regions that contain
1804the preprocessor language to the cluster htmlPreproc.
1805
1806
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001807HTML/OS (by Aestiva) *htmlos.vim* *ft-htmlos-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001808
1809The coloring scheme for HTML/OS works as follows:
1810
1811Functions and variable names are the same color by default, because VIM
1812doesn't specify different colors for Functions and Identifiers. To change
1813this (which is recommended if you want function names to be recognizable in a
1814different color) you need to add the following line to either your ~/.vimrc: >
1815 :hi Function term=underline cterm=bold ctermfg=LightGray
1816
1817Of course, the ctermfg can be a different color if you choose.
1818
1819Another issues that HTML/OS runs into is that there is no special filetype to
1820signify that it is a file with HTML/OS coding. You can change this by opening
1821a file and turning on HTML/OS syntax by doing the following: >
1822 :set syntax=htmlos
1823
1824Lastly, it should be noted that the opening and closing characters to begin a
1825block of HTML/OS code can either be << or [[ and >> or ]], respectively.
1826
1827
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001828IA64 *ia64.vim* *intel-itanium* *ft-ia64-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001829
1830Highlighting for the Intel Itanium 64 assembly language. See |asm.vim| for
1831how to recognize this filetype.
1832
1833To have *.inc files be recognized as IA64, add this to your .vimrc file: >
1834 :let g:filetype_inc = "ia64"
1835
1836
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001837INFORM *inform.vim* *ft-inform-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001838
1839Inform highlighting includes symbols provided by the Inform Library, as
1840most programs make extensive use of it. If do not wish Library symbols
1841to be highlighted add this to your vim startup: >
1842 :let inform_highlight_simple=1
1843
1844By default it is assumed that Inform programs are Z-machine targeted,
1845and highlights Z-machine assembly language symbols appropriately. If
1846you intend your program to be targeted to a Glulx/Glk environment you
1847need to add this to your startup sequence: >
1848 :let inform_highlight_glulx=1
1849
1850This will highlight Glulx opcodes instead, and also adds glk() to the
1851set of highlighted system functions.
1852
1853The Inform compiler will flag certain obsolete keywords as errors when
1854it encounters them. These keywords are normally highlighted as errors
1855by Vim. To prevent such error highlighting, you must add this to your
1856startup sequence: >
1857 :let inform_suppress_obsolete=1
1858
1859By default, the language features highlighted conform to Compiler
1860version 6.30 and Library version 6.11. If you are using an older
1861Inform development environment, you may with to add this to your
1862startup sequence: >
1863 :let inform_highlight_old=1
1864
Bram Moolenaar9e54a0e2006-04-14 20:42:25 +00001865IDL *idl.vim* *idl-syntax*
1866
1867IDL (Interface Definition Language) files are used to define RPC calls. In
1868Microsoft land, this is also used for defining COM interfaces and calls.
1869
1870IDL's structure is simple enough to permit a full grammar based approach to
1871rather than using a few heuristics. The result is large and somewhat
Bram Moolenaar25394022007-05-10 19:06:20 +00001872repetitive but seems to work.
Bram Moolenaar9e54a0e2006-04-14 20:42:25 +00001873
1874There are some Microsoft extensions to idl files that are here. Some of them
1875are disabled by defining idl_no_ms_extensions.
1876
1877The more complex of the extensions are disabled by defining idl_no_extensions.
1878
1879Variable Effect ~
1880
1881idl_no_ms_extensions Disable some of the Microsoft specific
1882 extensions
1883idl_no_extensions Disable complex extensions
1884idlsyntax_showerror Show IDL errors (can be rather intrusive, but
1885 quite helpful)
1886idlsyntax_showerror_soft Use softer colours by default for errors
1887
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001888
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001889JAVA *java.vim* *ft-java-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001890
1891The java.vim syntax highlighting file offers several options:
1892
1893In Java 1.0.2 it was never possible to have braces inside parens, so this was
1894flagged as an error. Since Java 1.1 this is possible (with anonymous
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001895classes), and therefore is no longer marked as an error. If you prefer the old
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001896way, put the following line into your vim startup file: >
1897 :let java_mark_braces_in_parens_as_errors=1
1898
1899All identifiers in java.lang.* are always visible in all classes. To
1900highlight them use: >
1901 :let java_highlight_java_lang_ids=1
1902
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001903You can also highlight identifiers of most standard Java packages if you
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001904download the javaid.vim script at http://www.fleiner.com/vim/download.html.
1905If you prefer to only highlight identifiers of a certain package, say java.io
1906use the following: >
1907 :let java_highlight_java_io=1
1908Check the javaid.vim file for a list of all the packages that are supported.
1909
1910Function names are not highlighted, as the way to find functions depends on
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001911how you write Java code. The syntax file knows two possible ways to highlight
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001912functions:
1913
1914If you write function declarations that are always indented by either
1915a tab, 8 spaces or 2 spaces you may want to set >
1916 :let java_highlight_functions="indent"
1917However, if you follow the Java guidelines about how functions and classes are
1918supposed to be named (with respect to upper and lowercase), use >
1919 :let java_highlight_functions="style"
1920If both options do not work for you, but you would still want function
1921declarations to be highlighted create your own definitions by changing the
1922definitions in java.vim or by creating your own java.vim which includes the
1923original one and then adds the code to highlight functions.
1924
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001925In Java 1.1 the functions System.out.println() and System.err.println() should
Bram Moolenaared203462004-06-16 11:19:22 +00001926only be used for debugging. Therefore it is possible to highlight debugging
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001927statements differently. To do this you must add the following definition in
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001928your startup file: >
1929 :let java_highlight_debug=1
1930The result will be that those statements are highlighted as 'Special'
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001931characters. If you prefer to have them highlighted differently you must define
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001932new highlightings for the following groups.:
1933 Debug, DebugSpecial, DebugString, DebugBoolean, DebugType
1934which are used for the statement itself, special characters used in debug
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001935strings, strings, boolean constants and types (this, super) respectively. I
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001936have opted to chose another background for those statements.
1937
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001938Javadoc is a program that takes special comments out of Java program files and
1939creates HTML pages. The standard configuration will highlight this HTML code
1940similarly to HTML files (see |html.vim|). You can even add Javascript
1941and CSS inside this code (see below). There are four differences however:
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001942 1. The title (all characters up to the first '.' which is followed by
1943 some white space or up to the first '@') is colored differently (to change
1944 the color change the group CommentTitle).
1945 2. The text is colored as 'Comment'.
1946 3. HTML comments are colored as 'Special'
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001947 4. The special Javadoc tags (@see, @param, ...) are highlighted as specials
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001948 and the argument (for @see, @param, @exception) as Function.
1949To turn this feature off add the following line to your startup file: >
1950 :let java_ignore_javadoc=1
1951
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001952If you use the special Javadoc comment highlighting described above you
1953can also turn on special highlighting for Javascript, visual basic
1954scripts and embedded CSS (stylesheets). This makes only sense if you
1955actually have Javadoc comments that include either Javascript or embedded
1956CSS. The options to use are >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001957 :let java_javascript=1
1958 :let java_css=1
1959 :let java_vb=1
1960
1961In order to highlight nested parens with different colors define colors
1962for javaParen, javaParen1 and javaParen2, for example with >
1963 :hi link javaParen Comment
1964or >
1965 :hi javaParen ctermfg=blue guifg=#0000ff
1966
1967If you notice highlighting errors while scrolling backwards, which are fixed
1968when redrawing with CTRL-L, try setting the "java_minlines" internal variable
1969to a larger number: >
1970 :let java_minlines = 50
1971This will make the syntax synchronization start 50 lines before the first
1972displayed line. The default value is 10. The disadvantage of using a larger
1973number is that redrawing can become slow.
1974
1975
Bram Moolenaar589edb32019-09-20 14:38:13 +02001976JSON *json.vim* *ft-json-syntax*
1977
1978The json syntax file provides syntax highlighting with conceal support by
1979default. To disable concealment: >
1980 let g:vim_json_conceal = 0
1981
1982To disable syntax highlighting of errors: >
1983 let g:vim_json_warnings = 0
1984
1985
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001986LACE *lace.vim* *ft-lace-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001987
1988Lace (Language for Assembly of Classes in Eiffel) is case insensitive, but the
1989style guide lines are not. If you prefer case insensitive highlighting, just
1990define the vim variable 'lace_case_insensitive' in your startup file: >
1991 :let lace_case_insensitive=1
1992
1993
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001994LEX *lex.vim* *ft-lex-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001995
1996Lex uses brute-force synchronizing as the "^%%$" section delimiter
1997gives no clue as to what section follows. Consequently, the value for >
1998 :syn sync minlines=300
1999may be changed by the user if s/he is experiencing synchronization
2000difficulties (such as may happen with large lex files).
2001
2002
Bram Moolenaar6fc45b52010-07-25 17:42:45 +02002003LIFELINES *lifelines.vim* *ft-lifelines-syntax*
2004
2005To highlight deprecated functions as errors, add in your .vimrc: >
2006
2007 :let g:lifelines_deprecated = 1
2008<
2009
Bram Moolenaara5fac542005-10-12 20:58:49 +00002010LISP *lisp.vim* *ft-lisp-syntax*
2011
2012The lisp syntax highlighting provides two options: >
2013
2014 g:lisp_instring : if it exists, then "(...)" strings are highlighted
2015 as if the contents of the string were lisp.
2016 Useful for AutoLisp.
2017 g:lisp_rainbow : if it exists and is nonzero, then differing levels
2018 of parenthesization will receive different
2019 highlighting.
2020<
2021The g:lisp_rainbow option provides 10 levels of individual colorization for
2022the parentheses and backquoted parentheses. Because of the quantity of
2023colorization levels, unlike non-rainbow highlighting, the rainbow mode
2024specifies its highlighting using ctermfg and guifg, thereby bypassing the
Bram Moolenaar723dd942019-04-04 13:11:03 +02002025usual color scheme control using standard highlighting groups. The actual
Bram Moolenaara5fac542005-10-12 20:58:49 +00002026highlighting used depends on the dark/bright setting (see |'bg'|).
2027
2028
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002029LITE *lite.vim* *ft-lite-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002030
2031There are two options for the lite syntax highlighting.
2032
2033If you like SQL syntax highlighting inside Strings, use this: >
2034
2035 :let lite_sql_query = 1
2036
2037For syncing, minlines defaults to 100. If you prefer another value, you can
2038set "lite_minlines" to the value you desire. Example: >
2039
2040 :let lite_minlines = 200
2041
2042
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002043LPC *lpc.vim* *ft-lpc-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002044
Bram Moolenaard2f3a8b2018-06-19 14:35:59 +02002045LPC stands for a simple, memory-efficient language: Lars Pensjö C. The
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002046file name of LPC is usually *.c. Recognizing these files as LPC would bother
2047users writing only C programs. If you want to use LPC syntax in Vim, you
2048should set a variable in your .vimrc file: >
2049
2050 :let lpc_syntax_for_c = 1
2051
2052If it doesn't work properly for some particular C or LPC files, use a
2053modeline. For a LPC file:
2054
2055 // vim:set ft=lpc:
2056
2057For a C file that is recognized as LPC:
2058
2059 // vim:set ft=c:
2060
2061If you don't want to set the variable, use the modeline in EVERY LPC file.
2062
2063There are several implementations for LPC, we intend to support most widely
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002064used ones. Here the default LPC syntax is for MudOS series, for MudOS v22
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002065and before, you should turn off the sensible modifiers, and this will also
Bram Moolenaar7e38ea22014-04-05 22:55:53 +02002066assert the new efuns after v22 to be invalid, don't set this variable when
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002067you are using the latest version of MudOS: >
2068
2069 :let lpc_pre_v22 = 1
2070
2071For LpMud 3.2 series of LPC: >
2072
2073 :let lpc_compat_32 = 1
2074
2075For LPC4 series of LPC: >
2076
2077 :let lpc_use_lpc4_syntax = 1
2078
2079For uLPC series of LPC:
2080uLPC has been developed to Pike, so you should use Pike syntax
2081instead, and the name of your source file should be *.pike
2082
2083
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002084LUA *lua.vim* *ft-lua-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002085
Bram Moolenaar5dc62522012-02-13 00:05:22 +01002086The Lua syntax file can be used for versions 4.0, 5.0, 5.1 and 5.2 (5.2 is
Bram Moolenaarfc1421e2006-04-20 22:17:20 +00002087the default). You can select one of these versions using the global variables
2088lua_version and lua_subversion. For example, to activate Lua
Bram Moolenaar5dc62522012-02-13 00:05:22 +010020895.1 syntax highlighting, set the variables like this:
Bram Moolenaarfc1421e2006-04-20 22:17:20 +00002090
2091 :let lua_version = 5
2092 :let lua_subversion = 1
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002093
2094
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002095MAIL *mail.vim* *ft-mail.vim*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002096
2097Vim highlights all the standard elements of an email (headers, signatures,
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002098quoted text and URLs / email addresses). In keeping with standard conventions,
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002099signatures begin in a line containing only "--" followed optionally by
2100whitespaces and end with a newline.
2101
2102Vim treats lines beginning with ']', '}', '|', '>' or a word followed by '>'
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002103as quoted text. However Vim highlights headers and signatures in quoted text
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002104only if the text is quoted with '>' (optionally followed by one space).
2105
2106By default mail.vim synchronises syntax to 100 lines before the first
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002107displayed line. If you have a slow machine, and generally deal with emails
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002108with short headers, you can change this to a smaller value: >
2109
2110 :let mail_minlines = 30
2111
2112
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002113MAKE *make.vim* *ft-make-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002114
2115In makefiles, commands are usually highlighted to make it easy for you to spot
2116errors. However, this may be too much coloring for you. You can turn this
2117feature off by using: >
2118
2119 :let make_no_commands = 1
2120
2121
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002122MAPLE *maple.vim* *ft-maple-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002123
2124Maple V, by Waterloo Maple Inc, supports symbolic algebra. The language
2125supports many packages of functions which are selectively loaded by the user.
2126The standard set of packages' functions as supplied in Maple V release 4 may be
2127highlighted at the user's discretion. Users may place in their .vimrc file: >
2128
2129 :let mvpkg_all= 1
2130
2131to get all package functions highlighted, or users may select any subset by
2132choosing a variable/package from the table below and setting that variable to
21331, also in their .vimrc file (prior to sourcing
2134$VIMRUNTIME/syntax/syntax.vim).
2135
2136 Table of Maple V Package Function Selectors >
2137 mv_DEtools mv_genfunc mv_networks mv_process
2138 mv_Galois mv_geometry mv_numapprox mv_simplex
2139 mv_GaussInt mv_grobner mv_numtheory mv_stats
2140 mv_LREtools mv_group mv_orthopoly mv_student
2141 mv_combinat mv_inttrans mv_padic mv_sumtools
2142 mv_combstruct mv_liesymm mv_plots mv_tensor
2143 mv_difforms mv_linalg mv_plottools mv_totorder
2144 mv_finance mv_logic mv_powseries
2145
2146
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002147MATHEMATICA *mma.vim* *ft-mma-syntax* *ft-mathematica-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar34cdc3e2005-05-18 22:24:46 +00002148
2149Empty *.m files will automatically be presumed to be Matlab files unless you
2150have the following in your .vimrc: >
2151
2152 let filetype_m = "mma"
2153
2154
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002155MOO *moo.vim* *ft-moo-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002156
2157If you use C-style comments inside expressions and find it mangles your
2158highlighting, you may want to use extended (slow!) matches for C-style
2159comments: >
2160
2161 :let moo_extended_cstyle_comments = 1
2162
2163To disable highlighting of pronoun substitution patterns inside strings: >
2164
2165 :let moo_no_pronoun_sub = 1
2166
2167To disable highlighting of the regular expression operator '%|', and matching
2168'%(' and '%)' inside strings: >
2169
2170 :let moo_no_regexp = 1
2171
2172Unmatched double quotes can be recognized and highlighted as errors: >
2173
2174 :let moo_unmatched_quotes = 1
2175
2176To highlight builtin properties (.name, .location, .programmer etc.): >
2177
2178 :let moo_builtin_properties = 1
2179
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002180Unknown builtin functions can be recognized and highlighted as errors. If you
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002181use this option, add your own extensions to the mooKnownBuiltinFunction group.
2182To enable this option: >
2183
2184 :let moo_unknown_builtin_functions = 1
2185
2186An example of adding sprintf() to the list of known builtin functions: >
2187
2188 :syn keyword mooKnownBuiltinFunction sprintf contained
2189
2190
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002191MSQL *msql.vim* *ft-msql-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002192
2193There are two options for the msql syntax highlighting.
2194
2195If you like SQL syntax highlighting inside Strings, use this: >
2196
2197 :let msql_sql_query = 1
2198
2199For syncing, minlines defaults to 100. If you prefer another value, you can
2200set "msql_minlines" to the value you desire. Example: >
2201
2202 :let msql_minlines = 200
2203
2204
Bram Moolenaarc572da52017-08-27 16:52:01 +02002205N1QL *n1ql.vim* *ft-n1ql-syntax*
2206
2207N1QL is a SQL-like declarative language for manipulating JSON documents in
2208Couchbase Server databases.
2209
2210Vim syntax highlights N1QL statements, keywords, operators, types, comments,
2211and special values. Vim ignores syntactical elements specific to SQL or its
2212many dialects, like COLUMN or CHAR, that don't exist in N1QL.
2213
2214
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002215NCF *ncf.vim* *ft-ncf-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002216
2217There is one option for NCF syntax highlighting.
2218
2219If you want to have unrecognized (by ncf.vim) statements highlighted as
2220errors, use this: >
2221
2222 :let ncf_highlight_unknowns = 1
2223
2224If you don't want to highlight these errors, leave it unset.
2225
2226
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002227NROFF *nroff.vim* *ft-nroff-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002228
2229The nroff syntax file works with AT&T n/troff out of the box. You need to
2230activate the GNU groff extra features included in the syntax file before you
2231can use them.
2232
2233For example, Linux and BSD distributions use groff as their default text
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002234processing package. In order to activate the extra syntax highlighting
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002235features for groff, add the following option to your start-up files: >
2236
2237 :let b:nroff_is_groff = 1
2238
2239Groff is different from the old AT&T n/troff that you may still find in
2240Solaris. Groff macro and request names can be longer than 2 characters and
2241there are extensions to the language primitives. For example, in AT&T troff
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002242you access the year as a 2-digit number with the request \(yr. In groff you
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002243can use the same request, recognized for compatibility, or you can use groff's
2244native syntax, \[yr]. Furthermore, you can use a 4-digit year directly:
2245\[year]. Macro requests can be longer than 2 characters, for example, GNU mm
2246accepts the requests ".VERBON" and ".VERBOFF" for creating verbatim
2247environments.
2248
2249In order to obtain the best formatted output g/troff can give you, you should
2250follow a few simple rules about spacing and punctuation.
2251
22521. Do not leave empty spaces at the end of lines.
2253
22542. Leave one space and one space only after an end-of-sentence period,
2255 exclamation mark, etc.
2256
22573. For reasons stated below, it is best to follow all period marks with a
2258 carriage return.
2259
2260The reason behind these unusual tips is that g/n/troff have a line breaking
2261algorithm that can be easily upset if you don't follow the rules given above.
2262
2263Unlike TeX, troff fills text line-by-line, not paragraph-by-paragraph and,
2264furthermore, it does not have a concept of glue or stretch, all horizontal and
2265vertical space input will be output as is.
2266
2267Therefore, you should be careful about not using more space between sentences
2268than you intend to have in your final document. For this reason, the common
2269practice is to insert a carriage return immediately after all punctuation
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002270marks. If you want to have "even" text in your final processed output, you
Bram Moolenaarbf884932013-04-05 22:26:15 +02002271need to maintain regular spacing in the input text. To mark both trailing
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002272spaces and two or more spaces after a punctuation as an error, use: >
2273
2274 :let nroff_space_errors = 1
2275
2276Another technique to detect extra spacing and other errors that will interfere
2277with the correct typesetting of your file, is to define an eye-catching
2278highlighting definition for the syntax groups "nroffDefinition" and
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002279"nroffDefSpecial" in your configuration files. For example: >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002280
2281 hi def nroffDefinition term=italic cterm=italic gui=reverse
2282 hi def nroffDefSpecial term=italic,bold cterm=italic,bold
2283 \ gui=reverse,bold
2284
2285If you want to navigate preprocessor entries in your source file as easily as
2286with section markers, you can activate the following option in your .vimrc
2287file: >
2288
2289 let b:preprocs_as_sections = 1
2290
Bram Moolenaar69a7cb42004-06-20 12:51:53 +00002291As well, the syntax file adds an extra paragraph marker for the extended
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002292paragraph macro (.XP) in the ms package.
2293
2294Finally, there is a |groff.vim| syntax file that can be used for enabling
2295groff syntax highlighting either on a file basis or globally by default.
2296
2297
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002298OCAML *ocaml.vim* *ft-ocaml-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002299
2300The OCaml syntax file handles files having the following prefixes: .ml,
2301.mli, .mll and .mly. By setting the following variable >
2302
2303 :let ocaml_revised = 1
2304
2305you can switch from standard OCaml-syntax to revised syntax as supported
2306by the camlp4 preprocessor. Setting the variable >
2307
2308 :let ocaml_noend_error = 1
2309
2310prevents highlighting of "end" as error, which is useful when sources
2311contain very long structures that Vim does not synchronize anymore.
2312
2313
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002314PAPP *papp.vim* *ft-papp-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002315
2316The PApp syntax file handles .papp files and, to a lesser extend, .pxml
2317and .pxsl files which are all a mixture of perl/xml/html/other using xml
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002318as the top-level file format. By default everything inside phtml or pxml
2319sections is treated as a string with embedded preprocessor commands. If
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002320you set the variable: >
2321
2322 :let papp_include_html=1
2323
2324in your startup file it will try to syntax-hilight html code inside phtml
2325sections, but this is relatively slow and much too colourful to be able to
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002326edit sensibly. ;)
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002327
2328The newest version of the papp.vim syntax file can usually be found at
2329http://papp.plan9.de.
2330
2331
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002332PASCAL *pascal.vim* *ft-pascal-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002333
2334Files matching "*.p" could be Progress or Pascal. If the automatic detection
2335doesn't work for you, or you don't edit Progress at all, use this in your
2336startup vimrc: >
2337
2338 :let filetype_p = "pascal"
2339
2340The Pascal syntax file has been extended to take into account some extensions
2341provided by Turbo Pascal, Free Pascal Compiler and GNU Pascal Compiler.
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002342Delphi keywords are also supported. By default, Turbo Pascal 7.0 features are
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002343enabled. If you prefer to stick with the standard Pascal keywords, add the
2344following line to your startup file: >
2345
2346 :let pascal_traditional=1
2347
2348To switch on Delphi specific constructions (such as one-line comments,
2349keywords, etc): >
2350
2351 :let pascal_delphi=1
2352
2353
2354The option pascal_symbol_operator controls whether symbol operators such as +,
2355*, .., etc. are displayed using the Operator color or not. To colorize symbol
2356operators, add the following line to your startup file: >
2357
2358 :let pascal_symbol_operator=1
2359
2360Some functions are highlighted by default. To switch it off: >
2361
2362 :let pascal_no_functions=1
2363
Bram Moolenaar996343d2010-07-04 22:20:21 +02002364Furthermore, there are specific variables for some compilers. Besides
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002365pascal_delphi, there are pascal_gpc and pascal_fpc. Default extensions try to
2366match Turbo Pascal. >
2367
2368 :let pascal_gpc=1
2369
2370or >
2371
2372 :let pascal_fpc=1
2373
2374To ensure that strings are defined on a single line, you can define the
2375pascal_one_line_string variable. >
2376
2377 :let pascal_one_line_string=1
2378
2379If you dislike <Tab> chars, you can set the pascal_no_tabs variable. Tabs
2380will be highlighted as Error. >
2381
2382 :let pascal_no_tabs=1
2383
2384
2385
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002386PERL *perl.vim* *ft-perl-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002387
2388There are a number of possible options to the perl syntax highlighting.
2389
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02002390Inline POD highlighting is now turned on by default. If you don't wish
2391to have the added complexity of highlighting POD embedded within Perl
2392files, you may set the 'perl_include_pod' option to 0: >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002393
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02002394 :let perl_include_pod = 0
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002395
Bram Moolenaar822ff862014-06-12 21:46:14 +02002396To reduce the complexity of parsing (and increase performance) you can switch
Bram Moolenaard4755bb2004-09-02 19:12:26 +00002397off two elements in the parsing of variable names and contents. >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002398
Bram Moolenaard4755bb2004-09-02 19:12:26 +00002399To handle package references in variable and function names not differently
2400from the rest of the name (like 'PkgName::' in '$PkgName::VarName'): >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002401
Bram Moolenaard4755bb2004-09-02 19:12:26 +00002402 :let perl_no_scope_in_variables = 1
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002403
Bram Moolenaard4755bb2004-09-02 19:12:26 +00002404(In Vim 6.x it was the other way around: "perl_want_scope_in_variables"
2405enabled it.)
2406
2407If you do not want complex things like '@{${"foo"}}' to be parsed: >
2408
2409 :let perl_no_extended_vars = 1
2410
Bram Moolenaar3fdfa4a2004-10-07 21:02:47 +00002411(In Vim 6.x it was the other way around: "perl_extended_vars" enabled it.)
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002412
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002413The coloring strings can be changed. By default strings and qq friends will be
2414highlighted like the first line. If you set the variable
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002415perl_string_as_statement, it will be highlighted as in the second line.
2416
2417 "hello world!"; qq|hello world|;
2418 ^^^^^^^^^^^^^^NN^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^N (unlet perl_string_as_statement)
2419 S^^^^^^^^^^^^SNNSSS^^^^^^^^^^^SN (let perl_string_as_statement)
2420
2421(^ = perlString, S = perlStatement, N = None at all)
2422
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002423The syncing has 3 options. The first two switch off some triggering of
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002424synchronization and should only be needed in case it fails to work properly.
2425If while scrolling all of a sudden the whole screen changes color completely
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002426then you should try and switch off one of those. Let me know if you can figure
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002427out the line that causes the mistake.
2428
2429One triggers on "^\s*sub\s*" and the other on "^[$@%]" more or less. >
2430
2431 :let perl_no_sync_on_sub
2432 :let perl_no_sync_on_global_var
2433
2434Below you can set the maximum distance VIM should look for starting points for
2435its attempts in syntax highlighting. >
2436
2437 :let perl_sync_dist = 100
2438
2439If you want to use folding with perl, set perl_fold: >
2440
Bram Moolenaard4755bb2004-09-02 19:12:26 +00002441 :let perl_fold = 1
2442
2443If you want to fold blocks in if statements, etc. as well set the following: >
2444
2445 :let perl_fold_blocks = 1
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002446
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02002447Subroutines are folded by default if 'perl_fold' is set. If you do not want
2448this, you can set 'perl_nofold_subs': >
Bram Moolenaar8ada17c2006-01-19 22:16:24 +00002449
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02002450 :let perl_nofold_subs = 1
Bram Moolenaar8ada17c2006-01-19 22:16:24 +00002451
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02002452Anonymous subroutines are not folded by default; you may enable their folding
2453via 'perl_fold_anonymous_subs': >
Bram Moolenaar8ada17c2006-01-19 22:16:24 +00002454
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02002455 :let perl_fold_anonymous_subs = 1
2456
2457Packages are also folded by default if 'perl_fold' is set. To disable this
2458behavior, set 'perl_nofold_packages': >
2459
2460 :let perl_nofold_packages = 1
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002461
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002462PHP3 and PHP4 *php.vim* *php3.vim* *ft-php-syntax* *ft-php3-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002463
2464[note: previously this was called "php3", but since it now also supports php4
2465it has been renamed to "php"]
2466
2467There are the following options for the php syntax highlighting.
2468
2469If you like SQL syntax highlighting inside Strings: >
2470
2471 let php_sql_query = 1
2472
2473For highlighting the Baselib methods: >
2474
2475 let php_baselib = 1
2476
2477Enable HTML syntax highlighting inside strings: >
2478
2479 let php_htmlInStrings = 1
2480
2481Using the old colorstyle: >
2482
2483 let php_oldStyle = 1
2484
2485Enable highlighting ASP-style short tags: >
2486
2487 let php_asp_tags = 1
2488
2489Disable short tags: >
2490
2491 let php_noShortTags = 1
2492
2493For highlighting parent error ] or ): >
2494
2495 let php_parent_error_close = 1
2496
Bram Moolenaar543b7ef2013-06-01 14:50:56 +02002497For skipping a php end tag, if there exists an open ( or [ without a closing
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002498one: >
2499
2500 let php_parent_error_open = 1
2501
2502Enable folding for classes and functions: >
2503
2504 let php_folding = 1
2505
2506Selecting syncing method: >
2507
2508 let php_sync_method = x
2509
2510x = -1 to sync by search (default),
2511x > 0 to sync at least x lines backwards,
2512x = 0 to sync from start.
2513
2514
Bram Moolenaard2cec5b2006-03-28 21:08:56 +00002515PLAINTEX *plaintex.vim* *ft-plaintex-syntax*
2516
2517TeX is a typesetting language, and plaintex is the file type for the "plain"
2518variant of TeX. If you never want your *.tex files recognized as plain TeX,
Bram Moolenaarc9b4b052006-04-30 18:54:39 +00002519see |ft-tex-plugin|.
Bram Moolenaard2cec5b2006-03-28 21:08:56 +00002520
2521This syntax file has the option >
2522
2523 let g:plaintex_delimiters = 1
2524
2525if you want to highlight brackets "[]" and braces "{}".
2526
2527
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002528PPWIZARD *ppwiz.vim* *ft-ppwiz-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002529
2530PPWizard is a preprocessor for HTML and OS/2 INF files
2531
2532This syntax file has the options:
2533
2534- ppwiz_highlight_defs : determines highlighting mode for PPWizard's
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002535 definitions. Possible values are
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002536
2537 ppwiz_highlight_defs = 1 : PPWizard #define statements retain the
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002538 colors of their contents (e.g. PPWizard macros and variables)
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002539
2540 ppwiz_highlight_defs = 2 : preprocessor #define and #evaluate
2541 statements are shown in a single color with the exception of line
2542 continuation symbols
2543
2544 The default setting for ppwiz_highlight_defs is 1.
2545
2546- ppwiz_with_html : If the value is 1 (the default), highlight literal
2547 HTML code; if 0, treat HTML code like ordinary text.
2548
2549
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002550PHTML *phtml.vim* *ft-phtml-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002551
2552There are two options for the phtml syntax highlighting.
2553
2554If you like SQL syntax highlighting inside Strings, use this: >
2555
2556 :let phtml_sql_query = 1
2557
2558For syncing, minlines defaults to 100. If you prefer another value, you can
2559set "phtml_minlines" to the value you desire. Example: >
2560
2561 :let phtml_minlines = 200
2562
2563
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002564POSTSCRIPT *postscr.vim* *ft-postscr-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002565
2566There are several options when it comes to highlighting PostScript.
2567
2568First which version of the PostScript language to highlight. There are
2569currently three defined language versions, or levels. Level 1 is the original
2570and base version, and includes all extensions prior to the release of level 2.
2571Level 2 is the most common version around, and includes its own set of
2572extensions prior to the release of level 3. Level 3 is currently the highest
2573level supported. You select which level of the PostScript language you want
2574highlighted by defining the postscr_level variable as follows: >
2575
2576 :let postscr_level=2
2577
2578If this variable is not defined it defaults to 2 (level 2) since this is
2579the most prevalent version currently.
2580
2581Note, not all PS interpreters will support all language features for a
2582particular language level. In particular the %!PS-Adobe-3.0 at the start of
2583PS files does NOT mean the PostScript present is level 3 PostScript!
2584
2585If you are working with Display PostScript, you can include highlighting of
2586Display PS language features by defining the postscr_display variable as
2587follows: >
2588
2589 :let postscr_display=1
2590
2591If you are working with Ghostscript, you can include highlighting of
2592Ghostscript specific language features by defining the variable
2593postscr_ghostscript as follows: >
2594
2595 :let postscr_ghostscript=1
2596
2597PostScript is a large language, with many predefined elements. While it
2598useful to have all these elements highlighted, on slower machines this can
2599cause Vim to slow down. In an attempt to be machine friendly font names and
2600character encodings are not highlighted by default. Unless you are working
2601explicitly with either of these this should be ok. If you want them to be
2602highlighted you should set one or both of the following variables: >
2603
2604 :let postscr_fonts=1
2605 :let postscr_encodings=1
2606
2607There is a stylistic option to the highlighting of and, or, and not. In
2608PostScript the function of these operators depends on the types of their
2609operands - if the operands are booleans then they are the logical operators,
2610if they are integers then they are binary operators. As binary and logical
2611operators can be highlighted differently they have to be highlighted one way
2612or the other. By default they are treated as logical operators. They can be
2613highlighted as binary operators by defining the variable
2614postscr_andornot_binary as follows: >
2615
2616 :let postscr_andornot_binary=1
2617<
2618
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002619 *ptcap.vim* *ft-printcap-syntax*
2620PRINTCAP + TERMCAP *ft-ptcap-syntax* *ft-termcap-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002621
2622This syntax file applies to the printcap and termcap databases.
2623
2624In order for Vim to recognize printcap/termcap files that do not match
2625the patterns *printcap*, or *termcap*, you must put additional patterns
2626appropriate to your system in your |myfiletypefile| file. For these
2627patterns, you must set the variable "b:ptcap_type" to either "print" or
2628"term", and then the 'filetype' option to ptcap.
2629
2630For example, to make Vim identify all files in /etc/termcaps/ as termcap
2631files, add the following: >
2632
2633 :au BufNewFile,BufRead /etc/termcaps/* let b:ptcap_type = "term" |
2634 \ set filetype=ptcap
2635
2636If you notice highlighting errors while scrolling backwards, which
2637are fixed when redrawing with CTRL-L, try setting the "ptcap_minlines"
2638internal variable to a larger number: >
2639
2640 :let ptcap_minlines = 50
2641
2642(The default is 20 lines.)
2643
2644
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002645PROGRESS *progress.vim* *ft-progress-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002646
2647Files matching "*.w" could be Progress or cweb. If the automatic detection
2648doesn't work for you, or you don't edit cweb at all, use this in your
2649startup vimrc: >
2650 :let filetype_w = "progress"
2651The same happens for "*.i", which could be assembly, and "*.p", which could be
2652Pascal. Use this if you don't use assembly and Pascal: >
2653 :let filetype_i = "progress"
2654 :let filetype_p = "progress"
2655
2656
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002657PYTHON *python.vim* *ft-python-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002658
Bram Moolenaar34700a62013-03-07 13:20:54 +01002659There are six options to control Python syntax highlighting.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002660
2661For highlighted numbers: >
Bram Moolenaar34700a62013-03-07 13:20:54 +01002662 :let python_no_number_highlight = 1
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002663
2664For highlighted builtin functions: >
Bram Moolenaar34700a62013-03-07 13:20:54 +01002665 :let python_no_builtin_highlight = 1
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002666
2667For highlighted standard exceptions: >
Bram Moolenaar34700a62013-03-07 13:20:54 +01002668 :let python_no_exception_highlight = 1
2669
2670For highlighted doctests and code inside: >
2671 :let python_no_doctest_highlight = 1
2672or >
2673 :let python_no_doctest_code_highlight = 1
2674(first option implies second one).
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002675
Bram Moolenaar4a748032010-09-30 21:47:56 +02002676For highlighted trailing whitespace and mix of spaces and tabs: >
Bram Moolenaar34700a62013-03-07 13:20:54 +01002677 :let python_space_error_highlight = 1
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002678
2679If you want all possible Python highlighting (the same as setting the
Bram Moolenaar34700a62013-03-07 13:20:54 +01002680preceding last option and unsetting all other ones): >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002681 :let python_highlight_all = 1
2682
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02002683Note: only existence of these options matter, not their value. You can replace
Bram Moolenaar34700a62013-03-07 13:20:54 +01002684 1 above with anything.
2685
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002686QUAKE *quake.vim* *ft-quake-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002687
2688The Quake syntax definition should work for most any FPS (First Person
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002689Shooter) based on one of the Quake engines. However, the command names vary
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002690a bit between the three games (Quake, Quake 2, and Quake 3 Arena) so the
2691syntax definition checks for the existence of three global variables to allow
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002692users to specify what commands are legal in their files. The three variables
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002693can be set for the following effects:
2694
2695set to highlight commands only available in Quake: >
2696 :let quake_is_quake1 = 1
2697
2698set to highlight commands only available in Quake 2: >
2699 :let quake_is_quake2 = 1
2700
2701set to highlight commands only available in Quake 3 Arena: >
2702 :let quake_is_quake3 = 1
2703
2704Any combination of these three variables is legal, but might highlight more
2705commands than are actually available to you by the game.
2706
2707
Bram Moolenaarfc65cab2018-08-28 22:58:02 +02002708R *r.vim* *ft-r-syntax*
2709
2710The parsing of R code for syntax highlight starts 40 lines backwards, but you
2711can set a different value in your |vimrc|. Example: >
2712 let r_syntax_minlines = 60
2713
2714You can also turn off syntax highlighting of ROxygen: >
2715 let r_syntax_hl_roxygen = 0
2716
2717enable folding of code delimited by parentheses, square brackets and curly
2718braces: >
2719 let r_syntax_folding = 1
2720
2721and highlight as functions all keywords followed by an opening parenthesis: >
2722 let r_syntax_fun_pattern = 1
2723
2724
2725R MARKDOWN *rmd.vim* *ft-rmd-syntax*
2726
2727To disable syntax highlight of YAML header, add to your |vimrc|: >
2728 let rmd_syn_hl_yaml = 0
2729
2730To disable syntax highlighting of citation keys: >
2731 let rmd_syn_hl_citations = 0
2732
2733To highlight R code in knitr chunk headers: >
2734 let rmd_syn_hl_chunk = 1
2735
2736By default, chunks of R code will be highlighted following the rules of R
2737language. If you want proper syntax highlighting of chunks of other languages,
2738you should add them to either `markdown_fenced_languages` or
2739`rmd_fenced_languages`. For example to properly highlight both R and Python,
2740you may add this to your |vimrc|: >
2741 let rmd_fenced_languages = ['r', 'python']
2742
2743
2744R RESTRUCTURED TEXT *rrst.vim* *ft-rrst-syntax*
2745
2746To highlight R code in knitr chunk headers, add to your |vimrc|: >
2747 let rrst_syn_hl_chunk = 1
2748
2749
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002750READLINE *readline.vim* *ft-readline-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002751
2752The readline library is primarily used by the BASH shell, which adds quite a
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002753few commands and options to the ones already available. To highlight these
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002754items as well you can add the following to your |vimrc| or just type it in the
2755command line before loading a file with the readline syntax: >
2756 let readline_has_bash = 1
2757
2758This will add highlighting for the commands that BASH (version 2.05a and
2759later, and part earlier) adds.
2760
2761
Bram Moolenaar97d62492012-11-15 21:28:22 +01002762RESTRUCTURED TEXT *rst.vim* *ft-rst-syntax*
2763
Bram Moolenaar4c05fa02019-01-01 15:32:17 +01002764Syntax highlighting is enabled for code blocks within the document for a
2765select number of file types. See $VIMRUNTIME/syntax/rst.vim for the default
2766syntax list.
2767
2768To set a user-defined list of code block syntax highlighting: >
Bram Moolenaar97d62492012-11-15 21:28:22 +01002769 let rst_syntax_code_list = ['vim', 'lisp', ...]
Bram Moolenaar4c05fa02019-01-01 15:32:17 +01002770
2771To assign multiple code block types to a single syntax, define
2772`rst_syntax_code_list` as a mapping: >
2773 let rst_syntax_code_list = {
2774 \ 'cpp' = ['cpp', 'c++'],
2775 \ 'bash' = ['bash', 'sh'],
2776 ...
2777 }
2778
2779To use color highlighting for emphasis text: >
2780 let rst_use_emphasis_colors = 1
2781
2782To enable folding of sections: >
2783 let rst_fold_enabled = 1
2784
2785Note that folding can cause performance issues on some platforms.
2786
Bram Moolenaar97d62492012-11-15 21:28:22 +01002787
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002788REXX *rexx.vim* *ft-rexx-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002789
2790If you notice highlighting errors while scrolling backwards, which are fixed
2791when redrawing with CTRL-L, try setting the "rexx_minlines" internal variable
2792to a larger number: >
2793 :let rexx_minlines = 50
2794This will make the syntax synchronization start 50 lines before the first
2795displayed line. The default value is 10. The disadvantage of using a larger
2796number is that redrawing can become slow.
2797
Bram Moolenaar97293012011-07-18 19:40:27 +02002798Vim tries to guess what type a ".r" file is. If it can't be detected (from
2799comment lines), the default is "r". To make the default rexx add this line to
2800your .vimrc: *g:filetype_r*
2801>
2802 :let g:filetype_r = "r"
2803
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002804
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002805RUBY *ruby.vim* *ft-ruby-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002806
Bram Moolenaar7e1479b2016-09-11 15:07:27 +02002807 Ruby: Operator highlighting |ruby_operators|
2808 Ruby: Whitespace errors |ruby_space_errors|
2809 Ruby: Folding |ruby_fold| |ruby_foldable_groups|
2810 Ruby: Reducing expensive operations |ruby_no_expensive| |ruby_minlines|
2811 Ruby: Spellchecking strings |ruby_spellcheck_strings|
2812
2813 *ruby_operators*
2814 Ruby: Operator highlighting ~
2815
2816Operators can be highlighted by defining "ruby_operators": >
2817
2818 :let ruby_operators = 1
2819<
2820 *ruby_space_errors*
2821 Ruby: Whitespace errors ~
2822
2823Whitespace errors can be highlighted by defining "ruby_space_errors": >
2824
2825 :let ruby_space_errors = 1
2826<
2827This will highlight trailing whitespace and tabs preceded by a space character
2828as errors. This can be refined by defining "ruby_no_trail_space_error" and
2829"ruby_no_tab_space_error" which will ignore trailing whitespace and tabs after
2830spaces respectively.
2831
2832 *ruby_fold* *ruby_foldable_groups*
2833 Ruby: Folding ~
2834
2835Folding can be enabled by defining "ruby_fold": >
2836
2837 :let ruby_fold = 1
2838<
2839This will set the value of 'foldmethod' to "syntax" locally to the current
2840buffer or window, which will enable syntax-based folding when editing Ruby
2841filetypes.
2842
Bram Moolenaar7e1479b2016-09-11 15:07:27 +02002843Default folding is rather detailed, i.e., small syntax units like "if", "do",
2844"%w[]" may create corresponding fold levels.
2845
2846You can set "ruby_foldable_groups" to restrict which groups are foldable: >
2847
2848 :let ruby_foldable_groups = 'if case %'
2849<
2850The value is a space-separated list of keywords:
2851
2852 keyword meaning ~
2853 -------- ------------------------------------- ~
2854 ALL Most block syntax (default)
2855 NONE Nothing
2856 if "if" or "unless" block
2857 def "def" block
2858 class "class" block
2859 module "module" block
2860 do "do" block
2861 begin "begin" block
2862 case "case" block
2863 for "for", "while", "until" loops
2864 { Curly bracket block or hash literal
2865 [ Array literal
2866 % Literal with "%" notation, e.g.: %w(STRING), %!STRING!
2867 / Regexp
2868 string String and shell command output (surrounded by ', ", `)
2869 : Symbol
2870 # Multiline comment
2871 << Here documents
2872 __END__ Source code after "__END__" directive
2873
2874 *ruby_no_expensive*
2875 Ruby: Reducing expensive operations ~
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002876
2877By default, the "end" keyword is colorized according to the opening statement
Bram Moolenaar943d2b52005-12-02 00:50:49 +00002878of the block it closes. While useful, this feature can be expensive; if you
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002879experience slow redrawing (or you are on a terminal with poor color support)
2880you may want to turn it off by defining the "ruby_no_expensive" variable: >
Bram Moolenaar943d2b52005-12-02 00:50:49 +00002881
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002882 :let ruby_no_expensive = 1
Bram Moolenaar25394022007-05-10 19:06:20 +00002883<
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002884In this case the same color will be used for all control keywords.
2885
Bram Moolenaar7e1479b2016-09-11 15:07:27 +02002886 *ruby_minlines*
2887
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002888If you do want this feature enabled, but notice highlighting errors while
2889scrolling backwards, which are fixed when redrawing with CTRL-L, try setting
2890the "ruby_minlines" variable to a value larger than 50: >
Bram Moolenaar943d2b52005-12-02 00:50:49 +00002891
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002892 :let ruby_minlines = 100
Bram Moolenaar25394022007-05-10 19:06:20 +00002893<
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002894Ideally, this value should be a number of lines large enough to embrace your
2895largest class or module.
2896
Bram Moolenaar7e1479b2016-09-11 15:07:27 +02002897 *ruby_spellcheck_strings*
2898 Ruby: Spellchecking strings ~
Bram Moolenaar943d2b52005-12-02 00:50:49 +00002899
Bram Moolenaar7e1479b2016-09-11 15:07:27 +02002900Ruby syntax will perform spellchecking of strings if you define
2901"ruby_spellcheck_strings": >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002902
Bram Moolenaar7e1479b2016-09-11 15:07:27 +02002903 :let ruby_spellcheck_strings = 1
Bram Moolenaar25394022007-05-10 19:06:20 +00002904<
Bram Moolenaarc81e5e72007-05-05 18:24:42 +00002905
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002906SCHEME *scheme.vim* *ft-scheme-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar21cf8232004-07-16 20:18:37 +00002907
Bram Moolenaar72540672018-02-09 22:00:53 +01002908By default only R7RS keywords are highlighted and properly indented.
Bram Moolenaar21cf8232004-07-16 20:18:37 +00002909
Bram Moolenaar72540672018-02-09 22:00:53 +01002910scheme.vim also supports extensions of the CHICKEN Scheme->C compiler.
2911Define b:is_chicken or g:is_chicken, if you need them.
Bram Moolenaar21cf8232004-07-16 20:18:37 +00002912
2913
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002914SDL *sdl.vim* *ft-sdl-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002915
2916The SDL highlighting probably misses a few keywords, but SDL has so many
2917of them it's almost impossibly to cope.
2918
2919The new standard, SDL-2000, specifies that all identifiers are
2920case-sensitive (which was not so before), and that all keywords can be
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002921used either completely lowercase or completely uppercase. To have the
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002922highlighting reflect this, you can set the following variable: >
2923 :let sdl_2000=1
2924
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002925This also sets many new keywords. If you want to disable the old
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002926keywords, which is probably a good idea, use: >
2927 :let SDL_no_96=1
2928
2929
2930The indentation is probably also incomplete, but right now I am very
2931satisfied with it for my own projects.
2932
2933
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002934SED *sed.vim* *ft-sed-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002935
2936To make tabs stand out from regular blanks (accomplished by using Todo
2937highlighting on the tabs), define "highlight_sedtabs" by putting >
2938
2939 :let highlight_sedtabs = 1
2940
2941in the vimrc file. (This special highlighting only applies for tabs
2942inside search patterns, replacement texts, addresses or text included
2943by an Append/Change/Insert command.) If you enable this option, it is
2944also a good idea to set the tab width to one character; by doing that,
2945you can easily count the number of tabs in a string.
2946
2947Bugs:
2948
2949 The transform command (y) is treated exactly like the substitute
2950 command. This means that, as far as this syntax file is concerned,
2951 transform accepts the same flags as substitute, which is wrong.
2952 (Transform accepts no flags.) I tolerate this bug because the
2953 involved commands need very complex treatment (95 patterns, one for
2954 each plausible pattern delimiter).
2955
2956
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002957SGML *sgml.vim* *ft-sgml-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002958
2959The coloring scheme for tags in the SGML file works as follows.
2960
2961The <> of opening tags are colored differently than the </> of a closing tag.
2962This is on purpose! For opening tags the 'Function' color is used, while for
2963closing tags the 'Type' color is used (See syntax.vim to check how those are
2964defined for you)
2965
2966Known tag names are colored the same way as statements in C. Unknown tag
2967names are not colored which makes it easy to spot errors.
2968
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002969Note that the same is true for argument (or attribute) names. Known attribute
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002970names are colored differently than unknown ones.
2971
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002972Some SGML tags are used to change the rendering of text. The following tags
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002973are recognized by the sgml.vim syntax coloring file and change the way normal
2974text is shown: <varname> <emphasis> <command> <function> <literal>
2975<replaceable> <ulink> and <link>.
2976
2977If you want to change how such text is rendered, you must redefine the
2978following syntax groups:
2979
2980 - sgmlBold
2981 - sgmlBoldItalic
2982 - sgmlUnderline
2983 - sgmlItalic
2984 - sgmlLink for links
2985
2986To make this redefinition work you must redefine them all and define the
2987following variable in your vimrc (this is due to the order in which the files
2988are read during initialization) >
2989 let sgml_my_rendering=1
2990
2991You can also disable this rendering by adding the following line to your
2992vimrc file: >
2993 let sgml_no_rendering=1
2994
2995(Adapted from the html.vim help text by Claudio Fleiner <claudio@fleiner.com>)
2996
2997
Bram Moolenaardc083282016-10-11 08:57:33 +02002998 *ft-posix-synax* *ft-dash-syntax*
2999SH *sh.vim* *ft-sh-syntax* *ft-bash-syntax* *ft-ksh-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003000
Bram Moolenaardc083282016-10-11 08:57:33 +02003001This covers syntax highlighting for the older Unix (Bourne) sh, and newer
3002shells such as bash, dash, posix, and the Korn shells.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003003
3004Vim attempts to determine which shell type is in use by specifying that
Bram Moolenaar91f84f62018-07-29 15:07:52 +02003005various filenames are of specific types, e.g.: >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003006
3007 ksh : .kshrc* *.ksh
3008 bash: .bashrc* bashrc bash.bashrc .bash_profile* *.bash
3009<
Bram Moolenaar91f84f62018-07-29 15:07:52 +02003010See $VIMRUNTIME/filetype.vim for the full list of patterns. If none of these
3011cases pertain, then the first line of the file is examined (ex. looking for
3012/bin/sh /bin/ksh /bin/bash). If the first line specifies a shelltype, then
3013that shelltype is used. However some files (ex. .profile) are known to be
3014shell files but the type is not apparent. Furthermore, on many systems sh is
3015symbolically linked to "bash" (Linux, Windows+cygwin) or "ksh" (Posix).
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003016
Bram Moolenaardc083282016-10-11 08:57:33 +02003017One may specify a global default by instantiating one of the following
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003018variables in your <.vimrc>:
3019
Bram Moolenaardc083282016-10-11 08:57:33 +02003020 ksh: >
Bram Moolenaar7fc904b2006-04-13 20:37:35 +00003021 let g:is_kornshell = 1
Bram Moolenaardc083282016-10-11 08:57:33 +02003022< posix: (using this is the nearly the same as setting g:is_kornshell to 1) >
Bram Moolenaar7fc904b2006-04-13 20:37:35 +00003023 let g:is_posix = 1
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003024< bash: >
Bram Moolenaar7fc904b2006-04-13 20:37:35 +00003025 let g:is_bash = 1
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00003026< sh: (default) Bourne shell >
Bram Moolenaar7fc904b2006-04-13 20:37:35 +00003027 let g:is_sh = 1
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003028
Bram Moolenaardc083282016-10-11 08:57:33 +02003029< (dash users should use posix)
3030
Bram Moolenaar910f66f2006-04-05 20:41:53 +00003031If there's no "#! ..." line, and the user hasn't availed himself/herself of a
3032default sh.vim syntax setting as just shown, then syntax/sh.vim will assume
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00003033the Bourne shell syntax. No need to quote RFCs or market penetration
3034statistics in error reports, please -- just select the default version of the
Bram Moolenaardc083282016-10-11 08:57:33 +02003035sh your system uses and install the associated "let..." in your <.vimrc>.
Bram Moolenaar910f66f2006-04-05 20:41:53 +00003036
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00003037The syntax/sh.vim file provides several levels of syntax-based folding: >
3038
3039 let g:sh_fold_enabled= 0 (default, no syntax folding)
3040 let g:sh_fold_enabled= 1 (enable function folding)
3041 let g:sh_fold_enabled= 2 (enable heredoc folding)
3042 let g:sh_fold_enabled= 4 (enable if/do/for folding)
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003043>
Bram Moolenaardc083282016-10-11 08:57:33 +02003044then various syntax items (ie. HereDocuments and function bodies) become
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00003045syntax-foldable (see |:syn-fold|). You also may add these together
3046to get multiple types of folding: >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003047
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00003048 let g:sh_fold_enabled= 3 (enables function and heredoc folding)
3049
3050If you notice highlighting errors while scrolling backwards which are fixed
3051when one redraws with CTRL-L, try setting the "sh_minlines" internal variable
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003052to a larger number. Example: >
3053
3054 let sh_minlines = 500
3055
3056This will make syntax synchronization start 500 lines before the first
3057displayed line. The default value is 200. The disadvantage of using a larger
3058number is that redrawing can become slow.
3059
3060If you don't have much to synchronize on, displaying can be very slow. To
3061reduce this, the "sh_maxlines" internal variable can be set. Example: >
3062
3063 let sh_maxlines = 100
3064<
3065The default is to use the twice sh_minlines. Set it to a smaller number to
3066speed up displaying. The disadvantage is that highlight errors may appear.
3067
Bram Moolenaar3df01732017-02-17 22:47:16 +01003068syntax/sh.vim tries to flag certain problems as errors; usually things like
3069extra ']'s, 'done's, 'fi's, etc. If you find the error handling problematic
3070for your purposes, you may suppress such error highlighting by putting
3071the following line in your .vimrc: >
3072
3073 let g:sh_no_error= 1
3074<
Bram Moolenaardc083282016-10-11 08:57:33 +02003075
Bram Moolenaard960d762011-09-21 19:22:10 +02003076 *sh-embed* *sh-awk*
3077 Sh: EMBEDDING LANGUAGES~
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003078
Bram Moolenaard960d762011-09-21 19:22:10 +02003079You may wish to embed languages into sh. I'll give an example courtesy of
3080Lorance Stinson on how to do this with awk as an example. Put the following
3081file into $HOME/.vim/after/syntax/sh/awkembed.vim: >
3082
Bram Moolenaardae8d212016-02-27 22:40:16 +01003083 " AWK Embedding:
Bram Moolenaard960d762011-09-21 19:22:10 +02003084 " ==============
3085 " Shamelessly ripped from aspperl.vim by Aaron Hope.
3086 if exists("b:current_syntax")
3087 unlet b:current_syntax
3088 endif
3089 syn include @AWKScript syntax/awk.vim
3090 syn region AWKScriptCode matchgroup=AWKCommand start=+[=\\]\@<!'+ skip=+\\'+ end=+'+ contains=@AWKScript contained
3091 syn region AWKScriptEmbedded matchgroup=AWKCommand start=+\<awk\>+ skip=+\\$+ end=+[=\\]\@<!'+me=e-1 contains=@shIdList,@shExprList2 nextgroup=AWKScriptCode
3092 syn cluster shCommandSubList add=AWKScriptEmbedded
3093 hi def link AWKCommand Type
3094<
3095This code will then let the awk code in the single quotes: >
3096 awk '...awk code here...'
3097be highlighted using the awk highlighting syntax. Clearly this may be
3098extended to other languages.
3099
3100
3101SPEEDUP *spup.vim* *ft-spup-syntax*
3102(AspenTech plant simulator)
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003103
3104The Speedup syntax file has some options:
3105
3106- strict_subsections : If this variable is defined, only keywords for
3107 sections and subsections will be highlighted as statements but not
3108 other keywords (like WITHIN in the OPERATION section).
3109
3110- highlight_types : Definition of this variable causes stream types
3111 like temperature or pressure to be highlighted as Type, not as a
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00003112 plain Identifier. Included are the types that are usually found in
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003113 the DECLARE section; if you defined own types, you have to include
3114 them in the syntax file.
3115
3116- oneline_comments : this value ranges from 1 to 3 and determines the
3117 highlighting of # style comments.
3118
3119 oneline_comments = 1 : allow normal Speedup code after an even
3120 number of #s.
3121
3122 oneline_comments = 2 : show code starting with the second # as
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00003123 error. This is the default setting.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003124
3125 oneline_comments = 3 : show the whole line as error if it contains
3126 more than one #.
3127
3128Since especially OPERATION sections tend to become very large due to
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00003129PRESETting variables, syncing may be critical. If your computer is
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003130fast enough, you can increase minlines and/or maxlines near the end of
3131the syntax file.
3132
3133
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00003134SQL *sql.vim* *ft-sql-syntax*
3135 *sqlinformix.vim* *ft-sqlinformix-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar1056d982006-03-09 22:37:52 +00003136 *sqlanywhere.vim* *ft-sqlanywhere-syntax*
Bram Moolenaard4755bb2004-09-02 19:12:26 +00003137
Bram Moolenaar1056d982006-03-09 22:37:52 +00003138While there is an ANSI standard for SQL, most database engines add their own
3139custom extensions. Vim currently supports the Oracle and Informix dialects of
3140SQL. Vim assumes "*.sql" files are Oracle SQL by default.
Bram Moolenaard4755bb2004-09-02 19:12:26 +00003141
Bram Moolenaar1056d982006-03-09 22:37:52 +00003142Vim currently has SQL support for a variety of different vendors via syntax
3143scripts. You can change Vim's default from Oracle to any of the current SQL
3144supported types. You can also easily alter the SQL dialect being used on a
3145buffer by buffer basis.
3146
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00003147For more detailed instructions see |ft_sql.txt|.
Bram Moolenaard4755bb2004-09-02 19:12:26 +00003148
3149
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00003150TCSH *tcsh.vim* *ft-tcsh-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003151
3152This covers the shell named "tcsh". It is a superset of csh. See |csh.vim|
3153for how the filetype is detected.
3154
3155Tcsh does not allow \" in strings unless the "backslash_quote" shell variable
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00003156is set. If you want VIM to assume that no backslash quote constructs exist add
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003157this line to your .vimrc: >
3158
3159 :let tcsh_backslash_quote = 0
3160
3161If you notice highlighting errors while scrolling backwards, which are fixed
3162when redrawing with CTRL-L, try setting the "tcsh_minlines" internal variable
3163to a larger number: >
3164
Bram Moolenaar8f3f58f2010-01-06 20:52:26 +01003165 :let tcsh_minlines = 1000
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003166
Bram Moolenaar8f3f58f2010-01-06 20:52:26 +01003167This will make the syntax synchronization start 1000 lines before the first
3168displayed line. If you set "tcsh_minlines" to "fromstart", then
3169synchronization is done from the start of the file. The default value for
3170tcsh_minlines is 100. The disadvantage of using a larger number is that
3171redrawing can become slow.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003172
3173
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02003174TEX *tex.vim* *ft-tex-syntax* *latex-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003175
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02003176 Tex Contents~
3177 Tex: Want Syntax Folding? |tex-folding|
3178 Tex: No Spell Checking Wanted |g:tex_nospell|
3179 Tex: Don't Want Spell Checking In Comments? |tex-nospell|
3180 Tex: Want Spell Checking in Verbatim Zones? |tex-verb|
3181 Tex: Run-on Comments or MathZones |tex-runon|
3182 Tex: Slow Syntax Highlighting? |tex-slow|
3183 Tex: Want To Highlight More Commands? |tex-morecommands|
3184 Tex: Excessive Error Highlighting? |tex-error|
3185 Tex: Need a new Math Group? |tex-math|
3186 Tex: Starting a New Style? |tex-style|
3187 Tex: Taking Advantage of Conceal Mode |tex-conceal|
3188 Tex: Selective Conceal Mode |g:tex_conceal|
3189 Tex: Controlling iskeyword |g:tex_isk|
Bram Moolenaar6e932462014-09-09 18:48:09 +02003190 Tex: Fine Subscript and Superscript Control |tex-supersub|
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02003191
3192 *tex-folding* *g:tex_fold_enabled*
Bram Moolenaar7fc0c062010-08-10 21:43:35 +02003193 Tex: Want Syntax Folding? ~
Bram Moolenaar488c6512005-08-11 20:09:58 +00003194
3195As of version 28 of <syntax/tex.vim>, syntax-based folding of parts, chapters,
3196sections, subsections, etc are supported. Put >
3197 let g:tex_fold_enabled=1
3198in your <.vimrc>, and :set fdm=syntax. I suggest doing the latter via a
3199modeline at the end of your LaTeX file: >
3200 % vim: fdm=syntax
Bram Moolenaard960d762011-09-21 19:22:10 +02003201If your system becomes too slow, then you might wish to look into >
Bram Moolenaar6c1e1572019-06-22 02:13:00 +02003202 https://vimhelp.org/vim_faq.txt.html#faq-29.7
Bram Moolenaar488c6512005-08-11 20:09:58 +00003203<
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02003204 *g:tex_nospell*
3205 Tex: No Spell Checking Wanted~
3206
3207If you don't want spell checking anywhere in your LaTeX document, put >
3208 let g:tex_nospell=1
3209into your .vimrc. If you merely wish to suppress spell checking inside
3210comments only, see |g:tex_comment_nospell|.
3211
3212 *tex-nospell* *g:tex_comment_nospell*
Bram Moolenaar7fc0c062010-08-10 21:43:35 +02003213 Tex: Don't Want Spell Checking In Comments? ~
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00003214
3215Some folks like to include things like source code in comments and so would
3216prefer that spell checking be disabled in comments in LaTeX files. To do
3217this, put the following in your <.vimrc>: >
3218 let g:tex_comment_nospell= 1
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02003219If you want to suppress spell checking everywhere inside your LaTeX document,
3220see |g:tex_nospell|.
3221
3222 *tex-verb* *g:tex_verbspell*
Bram Moolenaar7fc0c062010-08-10 21:43:35 +02003223 Tex: Want Spell Checking in Verbatim Zones?~
Bram Moolenaar74cbdf02010-08-04 23:03:17 +02003224
3225Often verbatim regions are used for things like source code; seldom does
3226one want source code spell-checked. However, for those of you who do
3227want your verbatim zones spell-checked, put the following in your <.vimrc>: >
3228 let g:tex_verbspell= 1
Bram Moolenaar7fc0c062010-08-10 21:43:35 +02003229<
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02003230 *tex-runon* *tex-stopzone*
Bram Moolenaar7fc0c062010-08-10 21:43:35 +02003231 Tex: Run-on Comments or MathZones ~
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003232
Bram Moolenaar488c6512005-08-11 20:09:58 +00003233The <syntax/tex.vim> highlighting supports TeX, LaTeX, and some AmsTeX. The
3234highlighting supports three primary zones/regions: normal, texZone, and
3235texMathZone. Although considerable effort has been made to have these zones
3236terminate properly, zones delineated by $..$ and $$..$$ cannot be synchronized
3237as there's no difference between start and end patterns. Consequently, a
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003238special "TeX comment" has been provided >
3239 %stopzone
3240which will forcibly terminate the highlighting of either a texZone or a
3241texMathZone.
3242
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02003243 *tex-slow* *tex-sync*
Bram Moolenaar7fc0c062010-08-10 21:43:35 +02003244 Tex: Slow Syntax Highlighting? ~
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003245
3246If you have a slow computer, you may wish to reduce the values for >
3247 :syn sync maxlines=200
3248 :syn sync minlines=50
3249(especially the latter). If your computer is fast, you may wish to
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00003250increase them. This primarily affects synchronizing (i.e. just what group,
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003251if any, is the text at the top of the screen supposed to be in?).
3252
Bram Moolenaard960d762011-09-21 19:22:10 +02003253Another cause of slow highlighting is due to syntax-driven folding; see
3254|tex-folding| for a way around this.
3255
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02003256 *g:tex_fast*
3257
3258Finally, if syntax highlighting is still too slow, you may set >
3259
3260 :let g:tex_fast= ""
3261
3262in your .vimrc. Used this way, the g:tex_fast variable causes the syntax
3263highlighting script to avoid defining any regions and associated
3264synchronization. The result will be much faster syntax highlighting; the
3265price: you will no longer have as much highlighting or any syntax-based
3266folding, and you will be missing syntax-based error checking.
3267
3268You may decide that some syntax is acceptable; you may use the following table
3269selectively to enable just some syntax highlighting: >
3270
3271 b : allow bold and italic syntax
3272 c : allow texComment syntax
3273 m : allow texMatcher syntax (ie. {...} and [...])
3274 M : allow texMath syntax
3275 p : allow parts, chapter, section, etc syntax
3276 r : allow texRefZone syntax (nocite, bibliography, label, pageref, eqref)
3277 s : allow superscript/subscript regions
3278 S : allow texStyle syntax
3279 v : allow verbatim syntax
3280 V : allow texNewEnv and texNewCmd syntax
3281<
3282As an example, let g:tex_fast= "M" will allow math-associated highlighting
3283but suppress all the other region-based syntax highlighting.
Bram Moolenaar6e932462014-09-09 18:48:09 +02003284(also see: |g:tex_conceal| and |tex-supersub|)
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02003285
3286 *tex-morecommands* *tex-package*
Bram Moolenaar7fc0c062010-08-10 21:43:35 +02003287 Tex: Want To Highlight More Commands? ~
Bram Moolenaarc81e5e72007-05-05 18:24:42 +00003288
3289LaTeX is a programmable language, and so there are thousands of packages full
3290of specialized LaTeX commands, syntax, and fonts. If you're using such a
3291package you'll often wish that the distributed syntax/tex.vim would support
3292it. However, clearly this is impractical. So please consider using the
3293techniques in |mysyntaxfile-add| to extend or modify the highlighting provided
Bram Moolenaarb6b046b2011-12-30 13:11:27 +01003294by syntax/tex.vim. Please consider uploading any extensions that you write,
3295which typically would go in $HOME/after/syntax/tex/[pkgname].vim, to
3296http://vim.sf.net/.
Bram Moolenaarc81e5e72007-05-05 18:24:42 +00003297
Bram Moolenaar93a1df22018-09-10 11:51:50 +02003298I've included some support for various popular packages on my website: >
3299
3300 http://www.drchip.org/astronaut/vim/index.html#LATEXPKGS
3301<
3302The syntax files there go into your .../after/syntax/tex/ directory.
3303
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02003304 *tex-error* *g:tex_no_error*
Bram Moolenaar7fc0c062010-08-10 21:43:35 +02003305 Tex: Excessive Error Highlighting? ~
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003306
3307The <tex.vim> supports lexical error checking of various sorts. Thus,
3308although the error checking is ofttimes very useful, it can indicate
3309errors where none actually are. If this proves to be a problem for you,
3310you may put in your <.vimrc> the following statement: >
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02003311 let g:tex_no_error=1
Bram Moolenaar488c6512005-08-11 20:09:58 +00003312and all error checking by <syntax/tex.vim> will be suppressed.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003313
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00003314 *tex-math*
Bram Moolenaar7fc0c062010-08-10 21:43:35 +02003315 Tex: Need a new Math Group? ~
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003316
3317If you want to include a new math group in your LaTeX, the following
3318code shows you an example as to how you might do so: >
Bram Moolenaar488c6512005-08-11 20:09:58 +00003319 call TexNewMathZone(sfx,mathzone,starform)
3320You'll want to provide the new math group with a unique suffix
3321(currently, A-L and V-Z are taken by <syntax/tex.vim> itself).
3322As an example, consider how eqnarray is set up by <syntax/tex.vim>: >
3323 call TexNewMathZone("D","eqnarray",1)
3324You'll need to change "mathzone" to the name of your new math group,
3325and then to the call to it in .vim/after/syntax/tex.vim.
3326The "starform" variable, if true, implies that your new math group
3327has a starred form (ie. eqnarray*).
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003328
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02003329 *tex-style* *b:tex_stylish*
Bram Moolenaar7fc0c062010-08-10 21:43:35 +02003330 Tex: Starting a New Style? ~
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003331
3332One may use "\makeatletter" in *.tex files, thereby making the use of "@" in
3333commands available. However, since the *.tex file doesn't have one of the
3334following suffices: sty cls clo dtx ltx, the syntax highlighting will flag
3335such use of @ as an error. To solve this: >
3336
3337 :let b:tex_stylish = 1
3338 :set ft=tex
3339
3340Putting "let g:tex_stylish=1" into your <.vimrc> will make <syntax/tex.vim>
3341always accept such use of @.
3342
Bram Moolenaar611df5b2010-07-26 22:51:56 +02003343 *tex-cchar* *tex-cole* *tex-conceal*
Bram Moolenaar7fc0c062010-08-10 21:43:35 +02003344 Tex: Taking Advantage of Conceal Mode~
Bram Moolenaar611df5b2010-07-26 22:51:56 +02003345
Bram Moolenaar477db062010-07-28 18:17:41 +02003346If you have |'conceallevel'| set to 2 and if your encoding is utf-8, then a
3347number of character sequences can be translated into appropriate utf-8 glyphs,
3348including various accented characters, Greek characters in MathZones, and
3349superscripts and subscripts in MathZones. Not all characters can be made into
3350superscripts or subscripts; the constraint is due to what utf-8 supports.
3351In fact, only a few characters are supported as subscripts.
3352
3353One way to use this is to have vertically split windows (see |CTRL-W_v|); one
3354with |'conceallevel'| at 0 and the other at 2; and both using |'scrollbind'|.
Bram Moolenaar611df5b2010-07-26 22:51:56 +02003355
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02003356 *g:tex_conceal*
Bram Moolenaar7fc0c062010-08-10 21:43:35 +02003357 Tex: Selective Conceal Mode~
3358
3359You may selectively use conceal mode by setting g:tex_conceal in your
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02003360<.vimrc>. By default, g:tex_conceal is set to "admgs" to enable concealment
3361for the following sets of characters: >
Bram Moolenaar7fc0c062010-08-10 21:43:35 +02003362
3363 a = accents/ligatures
Bram Moolenaard38b0552012-04-25 19:07:41 +02003364 b = bold and italic
Bram Moolenaar7fc0c062010-08-10 21:43:35 +02003365 d = delimiters
3366 m = math symbols
3367 g = Greek
3368 s = superscripts/subscripts
3369<
3370By leaving one or more of these out, the associated conceal-character
3371substitution will not be made.
3372
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02003373 *g:tex_isk* *g:tex_stylish*
3374 Tex: Controlling iskeyword~
3375
3376Normally, LaTeX keywords support 0-9, a-z, A-z, and 192-255 only. Latex
3377keywords don't support the underscore - except when in *.sty files. The
3378syntax highlighting script handles this with the following logic:
3379
3380 * If g:tex_stylish exists and is 1
3381 then the file will be treated as a "sty" file, so the "_"
3382 will be allowed as part of keywords
Bram Moolenaar3df01732017-02-17 22:47:16 +01003383 (regardless of g:tex_isk)
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02003384 * Else if the file's suffix is sty, cls, clo, dtx, or ltx,
3385 then the file will be treated as a "sty" file, so the "_"
3386 will be allowed as part of keywords
Bram Moolenaar3df01732017-02-17 22:47:16 +01003387 (regardless of g:tex_isk)
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02003388
3389 * If g:tex_isk exists, then it will be used for the local 'iskeyword'
3390 * Else the local 'iskeyword' will be set to 48-57,a-z,A-Z,192-255
3391
Bram Moolenaar6e932462014-09-09 18:48:09 +02003392 *tex-supersub* *g:tex_superscripts* *g:tex_subscripts*
3393 Tex: Fine Subscript and Superscript Control~
3394
3395 See |tex-conceal| for how to enable concealed character replacement.
3396
3397 See |g:tex_conceal| for selectively concealing accents, bold/italic,
3398 math, Greek, and superscripts/subscripts.
3399
3400 One may exert fine control over which superscripts and subscripts one
3401 wants syntax-based concealment for (see |:syn-cchar|). Since not all
3402 fonts support all characters, one may override the
3403 concealed-replacement lists; by default these lists are given by: >
3404
3405 let g:tex_superscripts= "[0-9a-zA-W.,:;+-<>/()=]"
3406 let g:tex_subscripts= "[0-9aehijklmnoprstuvx,+-/().]"
3407<
3408 For example, I use Luxi Mono Bold; it doesn't support subscript
3409 characters for "hklmnpst", so I put >
3410 let g:tex_subscripts= "[0-9aeijoruvx,+-/().]"
3411< in ~/.vim/ftplugin/tex/tex.vim in order to avoid having inscrutable
3412 utf-8 glyphs appear.
3413
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02003414
Bram Moolenaar22dbc772013-06-28 18:44:48 +02003415TF *tf.vim* *ft-tf-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003416
Bram Moolenaar22dbc772013-06-28 18:44:48 +02003417There is one option for the tf syntax highlighting.
3418
3419For syncing, minlines defaults to 100. If you prefer another value, you can
3420set "tf_minlines" to the value you desire. Example: >
3421
3422 :let tf_minlines = your choice
3423<
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00003424VIM *vim.vim* *ft-vim-syntax*
3425 *g:vimsyn_minlines* *g:vimsyn_maxlines*
Bram Moolenaar996343d2010-07-04 22:20:21 +02003426There is a trade-off between more accurate syntax highlighting versus screen
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00003427updating speed. To improve accuracy, you may wish to increase the
3428g:vimsyn_minlines variable. The g:vimsyn_maxlines variable may be used to
3429improve screen updating rates (see |:syn-sync| for more on this). >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003430
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00003431 g:vimsyn_minlines : used to set synchronization minlines
3432 g:vimsyn_maxlines : used to set synchronization maxlines
3433<
3434 (g:vim_minlines and g:vim_maxlines are deprecated variants of
3435 these two options)
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003436
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00003437 *g:vimsyn_embed*
3438The g:vimsyn_embed option allows users to select what, if any, types of
3439embedded script highlighting they wish to have. >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003440
Bram Moolenaara0f849e2015-10-30 14:37:44 +01003441 g:vimsyn_embed == 0 : don't support any embedded scripts
3442 g:vimsyn_embed =~ 'l' : support embedded lua
Bram Moolenaar7cba6c02013-09-05 22:13:31 +02003443 g:vimsyn_embed =~ 'm' : support embedded mzscheme
3444 g:vimsyn_embed =~ 'p' : support embedded perl
3445 g:vimsyn_embed =~ 'P' : support embedded python
3446 g:vimsyn_embed =~ 'r' : support embedded ruby
3447 g:vimsyn_embed =~ 't' : support embedded tcl
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00003448<
Bram Moolenaar7cba6c02013-09-05 22:13:31 +02003449By default, g:vimsyn_embed is a string supporting interpreters that your vim
3450itself supports. Concatenate multiple characters to support multiple types
3451of embedded interpreters; ie. g:vimsyn_embed= "mp" supports embedded mzscheme
3452and embedded perl.
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00003453 *g:vimsyn_folding*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003454
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00003455Some folding is now supported with syntax/vim.vim: >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003456
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00003457 g:vimsyn_folding == 0 or doesn't exist: no syntax-based folding
3458 g:vimsyn_folding =~ 'a' : augroups
3459 g:vimsyn_folding =~ 'f' : fold functions
Bram Moolenaara0f849e2015-10-30 14:37:44 +01003460 g:vimsyn_folding =~ 'l' : fold lua script
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00003461 g:vimsyn_folding =~ 'm' : fold mzscheme script
3462 g:vimsyn_folding =~ 'p' : fold perl script
3463 g:vimsyn_folding =~ 'P' : fold python script
3464 g:vimsyn_folding =~ 'r' : fold ruby script
3465 g:vimsyn_folding =~ 't' : fold tcl script
Bram Moolenaar30b65812012-07-12 22:01:11 +02003466<
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00003467 *g:vimsyn_noerror*
Bram Moolenaarb544f3c2017-02-23 19:03:28 +01003468Not all error highlighting that syntax/vim.vim does may be correct; Vim script
3469is a difficult language to highlight correctly. A way to suppress error
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00003470highlighting is to put the following line in your |vimrc|: >
Bram Moolenaar437df8f2006-04-27 21:47:44 +00003471
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00003472 let g:vimsyn_noerror = 1
3473<
Bram Moolenaar437df8f2006-04-27 21:47:44 +00003474
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003475
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00003476XF86CONFIG *xf86conf.vim* *ft-xf86conf-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003477
3478The syntax of XF86Config file differs in XFree86 v3.x and v4.x. Both
3479variants are supported. Automatic detection is used, but is far from perfect.
3480You may need to specify the version manually. Set the variable
3481xf86conf_xfree86_version to 3 or 4 according to your XFree86 version in
3482your .vimrc. Example: >
3483 :let xf86conf_xfree86_version=3
3484When using a mix of versions, set the b:xf86conf_xfree86_version variable.
3485
3486Note that spaces and underscores in option names are not supported. Use
3487"SyncOnGreen" instead of "__s yn con gr_e_e_n" if you want the option name
3488highlighted.
3489
3490
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00003491XML *xml.vim* *ft-xml-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003492
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00003493Xml namespaces are highlighted by default. This can be inhibited by
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003494setting a global variable: >
3495
3496 :let g:xml_namespace_transparent=1
3497<
3498 *xml-folding*
3499The xml syntax file provides syntax |folding| (see |:syn-fold|) between
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00003500start and end tags. This can be turned on by >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003501
3502 :let g:xml_syntax_folding = 1
3503 :set foldmethod=syntax
3504
3505Note: syntax folding might slow down syntax highlighting significantly,
3506especially for large files.
3507
3508
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00003509X Pixmaps (XPM) *xpm.vim* *ft-xpm-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003510
3511xpm.vim creates its syntax items dynamically based upon the contents of the
3512XPM file. Thus if you make changes e.g. in the color specification strings,
3513you have to source it again e.g. with ":set syn=xpm".
3514
3515To copy a pixel with one of the colors, yank a "pixel" with "yl" and insert it
3516somewhere else with "P".
3517
3518Do you want to draw with the mouse? Try the following: >
3519 :function! GetPixel()
Bram Moolenaar61660ea2006-04-07 21:40:07 +00003520 : let c = getline(".")[col(".") - 1]
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003521 : echo c
3522 : exe "noremap <LeftMouse> <LeftMouse>r".c
3523 : exe "noremap <LeftDrag> <LeftMouse>r".c
3524 :endfunction
3525 :noremap <RightMouse> <LeftMouse>:call GetPixel()<CR>
3526 :set guicursor=n:hor20 " to see the color beneath the cursor
3527This turns the right button into a pipette and the left button into a pen.
3528It will work with XPM files that have one character per pixel only and you
3529must not click outside of the pixel strings, but feel free to improve it.
3530
3531It will look much better with a font in a quadratic cell size, e.g. for X: >
3532 :set guifont=-*-clean-medium-r-*-*-8-*-*-*-*-80-*
3533
Bram Moolenaar5a5f4592015-04-13 12:43:06 +02003534
3535YAML *yaml.vim* *ft-yaml-syntax*
3536
3537 *g:yaml_schema* *b:yaml_schema*
3538A YAML schema is a combination of a set of tags and a mechanism for resolving
3539non-specific tags. For user this means that YAML parser may, depending on
3540plain scalar contents, treat plain scalar (which can actually be only string
3541and nothing else) as a value of the other type: null, boolean, floating-point,
3542integer. `g:yaml_schema` option determines according to which schema values
3543will be highlighted specially. Supported schemas are
3544
3545Schema Description ~
3546failsafe No additional highlighting.
3547json Supports JSON-style numbers, booleans and null.
3548core Supports more number, boolean and null styles.
3549pyyaml In addition to core schema supports highlighting timestamps,
3550 but there are some differences in what is recognized as
3551 numbers and many additional boolean values not present in core
3552 schema.
3553
3554Default schema is `core`.
3555
3556Note that schemas are not actually limited to plain scalars, but this is the
3557only difference between schemas defined in YAML specification and the only
3558difference defined in the syntax file.
3559
Bram Moolenaarf3913272016-02-25 00:00:01 +01003560
3561ZSH *zsh.vim* *ft-zsh-syntax*
3562
3563The syntax script for zsh allows for syntax-based folding: >
3564
3565 :let g:zsh_fold_enable = 1
3566
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003567==============================================================================
Bram Moolenaar9d87a372018-12-18 21:41:50 +010035686. Defining a syntax *:syn-define* *E410*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003569
3570Vim understands three types of syntax items:
3571
Bram Moolenaarce0842a2005-07-18 21:58:11 +000035721. Keyword
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003573 It can only contain keyword characters, according to the 'iskeyword'
3574 option. It cannot contain other syntax items. It will only match with a
3575 complete word (there are no keyword characters before or after the match).
3576 The keyword "if" would match in "if(a=b)", but not in "ifdef x", because
3577 "(" is not a keyword character and "d" is.
3578
Bram Moolenaarce0842a2005-07-18 21:58:11 +000035792. Match
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003580 This is a match with a single regexp pattern.
3581
Bram Moolenaarce0842a2005-07-18 21:58:11 +000035823. Region
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003583 This starts at a match of the "start" regexp pattern and ends with a match
3584 with the "end" regexp pattern. Any other text can appear in between. A
3585 "skip" regexp pattern can be used to avoid matching the "end" pattern.
3586
3587Several syntax ITEMs can be put into one syntax GROUP. For a syntax group
3588you can give highlighting attributes. For example, you could have an item
3589to define a "/* .. */" comment and another one that defines a "// .." comment,
3590and put them both in the "Comment" group. You can then specify that a
3591"Comment" will be in bold font and have a blue color. You are free to make
3592one highlight group for one syntax item, or put all items into one group.
3593This depends on how you want to specify your highlighting attributes. Putting
3594each item in its own group results in having to specify the highlighting
3595for a lot of groups.
3596
3597Note that a syntax group and a highlight group are similar. For a highlight
3598group you will have given highlight attributes. These attributes will be used
3599for the syntax group with the same name.
3600
3601In case more than one item matches at the same position, the one that was
3602defined LAST wins. Thus you can override previously defined syntax items by
3603using an item that matches the same text. But a keyword always goes before a
3604match or region. And a keyword with matching case always goes before a
3605keyword with ignoring case.
3606
3607
3608PRIORITY *:syn-priority*
3609
3610When several syntax items may match, these rules are used:
3611
36121. When multiple Match or Region items start in the same position, the item
3613 defined last has priority.
36142. A Keyword has priority over Match and Region items.
36153. An item that starts in an earlier position has priority over items that
3616 start in later positions.
3617
3618
3619DEFINING CASE *:syn-case* *E390*
3620
Bram Moolenaarce0842a2005-07-18 21:58:11 +00003621:sy[ntax] case [match | ignore]
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003622 This defines if the following ":syntax" commands will work with
3623 matching case, when using "match", or with ignoring case, when using
3624 "ignore". Note that any items before this are not affected, and all
3625 items until the next ":syntax case" command are affected.
3626
Bram Moolenaar690afe12017-01-28 18:34:47 +01003627:sy[ntax] case
3628 Show either "syntax case match" or "syntax case ignore" (translated).
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003629
Bram Moolenaarce0842a2005-07-18 21:58:11 +00003630SPELL CHECKING *:syn-spell*
3631
3632:sy[ntax] spell [toplevel | notoplevel | default]
3633 This defines where spell checking is to be done for text that is not
3634 in a syntax item:
3635
3636 toplevel: Text is spell checked.
3637 notoplevel: Text is not spell checked.
3638 default: When there is a @Spell cluster no spell checking.
3639
3640 For text in syntax items use the @Spell and @NoSpell clusters
3641 |spell-syntax|. When there is no @Spell and no @NoSpell cluster then
3642 spell checking is done for "default" and "toplevel".
3643
3644 To activate spell checking the 'spell' option must be set.
3645
Bram Moolenaar690afe12017-01-28 18:34:47 +01003646:sy[ntax] spell
3647 Show either "syntax spell toplevel", "syntax spell notoplevel" or
3648 "syntax spell default" (translated).
3649
3650
Bram Moolenaarb8060fe2016-01-19 22:29:28 +01003651SYNTAX ISKEYWORD SETTING *:syn-iskeyword*
3652
3653:sy[ntax] iskeyword [clear | {option}]
3654 This defines the keyword characters. It's like the 'iskeyword' option
3655 for but only applies to syntax highlighting.
3656
3657 clear: Syntax specific iskeyword setting is disabled and the
3658 buffer-local 'iskeyword' setting is used.
3659 {option} Set the syntax 'iskeyword' option to a new value.
3660
3661 Example: >
3662 :syntax iskeyword @,48-57,192-255,$,_
3663<
3664 This would set the syntax specific iskeyword option to include all
3665 alphabetic characters, plus the numeric characters, all accented
3666 characters and also includes the "_" and the "$".
3667
3668 If no argument is given, the current value will be output.
3669
3670 Setting this option influences what |/\k| matches in syntax patterns
Bram Moolenaar298b4402016-01-28 22:38:53 +01003671 and also determines where |:syn-keyword| will be checked for a new
Bram Moolenaarb8060fe2016-01-19 22:29:28 +01003672 match.
3673
Bram Moolenaard0796902016-09-16 20:02:31 +02003674 It is recommended when writing syntax files, to use this command to
3675 set the correct value for the specific syntax language and not change
Bram Moolenaarb8060fe2016-01-19 22:29:28 +01003676 the 'iskeyword' option.
Bram Moolenaarce0842a2005-07-18 21:58:11 +00003677
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003678DEFINING KEYWORDS *:syn-keyword*
3679
3680:sy[ntax] keyword {group-name} [{options}] {keyword} .. [{options}]
3681
3682 This defines a number of keywords.
3683
3684 {group-name} Is a syntax group name such as "Comment".
3685 [{options}] See |:syn-arguments| below.
3686 {keyword} .. Is a list of keywords which are part of this group.
3687
3688 Example: >
3689 :syntax keyword Type int long char
3690<
3691 The {options} can be given anywhere in the line. They will apply to
3692 all keywords given, also for options that come after a keyword.
3693 These examples do exactly the same: >
3694 :syntax keyword Type contained int long char
3695 :syntax keyword Type int long contained char
3696 :syntax keyword Type int long char contained
Bram Moolenaar88774fd2015-08-25 19:52:04 +02003697< *E789* *E890*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003698 When you have a keyword with an optional tail, like Ex commands in
3699 Vim, you can put the optional characters inside [], to define all the
3700 variations at once: >
3701 :syntax keyword vimCommand ab[breviate] n[ext]
3702<
3703 Don't forget that a keyword can only be recognized if all the
3704 characters are included in the 'iskeyword' option. If one character
3705 isn't, the keyword will never be recognized.
3706 Multi-byte characters can also be used. These do not have to be in
3707 'iskeyword'.
Bram Moolenaarb8060fe2016-01-19 22:29:28 +01003708 See |:syn-iskeyword| for defining syntax specific iskeyword settings.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003709
3710 A keyword always has higher priority than a match or region, the
3711 keyword is used if more than one item matches. Keywords do not nest
3712 and a keyword can't contain anything else.
3713
3714 Note that when you have a keyword that is the same as an option (even
3715 one that isn't allowed here), you can not use it. Use a match
3716 instead.
3717
3718 The maximum length of a keyword is 80 characters.
3719
3720 The same keyword can be defined multiple times, when its containment
3721 differs. For example, you can define the keyword once not contained
3722 and use one highlight group, and once contained, and use a different
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00003723 highlight group. Example: >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003724 :syn keyword vimCommand tag
3725 :syn keyword vimSetting contained tag
3726< When finding "tag" outside of any syntax item, the "vimCommand"
3727 highlight group is used. When finding "tag" in a syntax item that
3728 contains "vimSetting", the "vimSetting" group is used.
3729
3730
3731DEFINING MATCHES *:syn-match*
3732
Bram Moolenaar2ec618c2016-10-01 14:47:05 +02003733:sy[ntax] match {group-name} [{options}]
3734 [excludenl]
3735 [keepend]
3736 {pattern}
3737 [{options}]
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003738
3739 This defines one match.
3740
3741 {group-name} A syntax group name such as "Comment".
3742 [{options}] See |:syn-arguments| below.
3743 [excludenl] Don't make a pattern with the end-of-line "$"
3744 extend a containing match or region. Must be
3745 given before the pattern. |:syn-excludenl|
Bram Moolenaar2ec618c2016-10-01 14:47:05 +02003746 keepend Don't allow contained matches to go past a
3747 match with the end pattern. See
3748 |:syn-keepend|.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003749 {pattern} The search pattern that defines the match.
3750 See |:syn-pattern| below.
3751 Note that the pattern may match more than one
3752 line, which makes the match depend on where
3753 Vim starts searching for the pattern. You
3754 need to make sure syncing takes care of this.
3755
3756 Example (match a character constant): >
3757 :syntax match Character /'.'/hs=s+1,he=e-1
3758<
3759
3760DEFINING REGIONS *:syn-region* *:syn-start* *:syn-skip* *:syn-end*
3761 *E398* *E399*
3762:sy[ntax] region {group-name} [{options}]
3763 [matchgroup={group-name}]
3764 [keepend]
3765 [extend]
3766 [excludenl]
3767 start={start_pattern} ..
3768 [skip={skip_pattern}]
3769 end={end_pattern} ..
3770 [{options}]
3771
3772 This defines one region. It may span several lines.
3773
3774 {group-name} A syntax group name such as "Comment".
3775 [{options}] See |:syn-arguments| below.
3776 [matchgroup={group-name}] The syntax group to use for the following
3777 start or end pattern matches only. Not used
3778 for the text in between the matched start and
3779 end patterns. Use NONE to reset to not using
3780 a different group for the start or end match.
3781 See |:syn-matchgroup|.
3782 keepend Don't allow contained matches to go past a
3783 match with the end pattern. See
3784 |:syn-keepend|.
3785 extend Override a "keepend" for an item this region
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00003786 is contained in. See |:syn-extend|.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003787 excludenl Don't make a pattern with the end-of-line "$"
3788 extend a containing match or item. Only
3789 useful for end patterns. Must be given before
3790 the patterns it applies to. |:syn-excludenl|
3791 start={start_pattern} The search pattern that defines the start of
3792 the region. See |:syn-pattern| below.
3793 skip={skip_pattern} The search pattern that defines text inside
3794 the region where not to look for the end
3795 pattern. See |:syn-pattern| below.
3796 end={end_pattern} The search pattern that defines the end of
3797 the region. See |:syn-pattern| below.
3798
3799 Example: >
3800 :syntax region String start=+"+ skip=+\\"+ end=+"+
3801<
3802 The start/skip/end patterns and the options can be given in any order.
3803 There can be zero or one skip pattern. There must be one or more
3804 start and end patterns. This means that you can omit the skip
3805 pattern, but you must give at least one start and one end pattern. It
3806 is allowed to have white space before and after the equal sign
3807 (although it mostly looks better without white space).
3808
3809 When more than one start pattern is given, a match with one of these
3810 is sufficient. This means there is an OR relation between the start
3811 patterns. The last one that matches is used. The same is true for
3812 the end patterns.
3813
3814 The search for the end pattern starts right after the start pattern.
3815 Offsets are not used for this. This implies that the match for the
3816 end pattern will never overlap with the start pattern.
3817
3818 The skip and end pattern can match across line breaks, but since the
3819 search for the pattern can start in any line it often does not do what
3820 you want. The skip pattern doesn't avoid a match of an end pattern in
3821 the next line. Use single-line patterns to avoid trouble.
3822
3823 Note: The decision to start a region is only based on a matching start
3824 pattern. There is no check for a matching end pattern. This does NOT
3825 work: >
3826 :syn region First start="(" end=":"
3827 :syn region Second start="(" end=";"
3828< The Second always matches before the First (last defined pattern has
3829 higher priority). The Second region then continues until the next
3830 ';', no matter if there is a ':' before it. Using a match does work: >
3831 :syn match First "(\_.\{-}:"
3832 :syn match Second "(\_.\{-};"
3833< This pattern matches any character or line break with "\_." and
3834 repeats that with "\{-}" (repeat as few as possible).
3835
3836 *:syn-keepend*
3837 By default, a contained match can obscure a match for the end pattern.
3838 This is useful for nesting. For example, a region that starts with
3839 "{" and ends with "}", can contain another region. An encountered "}"
3840 will then end the contained region, but not the outer region:
3841 { starts outer "{}" region
3842 { starts contained "{}" region
3843 } ends contained "{}" region
3844 } ends outer "{} region
3845 If you don't want this, the "keepend" argument will make the matching
3846 of an end pattern of the outer region also end any contained item.
3847 This makes it impossible to nest the same region, but allows for
3848 contained items to highlight parts of the end pattern, without causing
3849 that to skip the match with the end pattern. Example: >
3850 :syn match vimComment +"[^"]\+$+
3851 :syn region vimCommand start="set" end="$" contains=vimComment keepend
3852< The "keepend" makes the vimCommand always end at the end of the line,
3853 even though the contained vimComment includes a match with the <EOL>.
3854
3855 When "keepend" is not used, a match with an end pattern is retried
3856 after each contained match. When "keepend" is included, the first
3857 encountered match with an end pattern is used, truncating any
3858 contained matches.
3859 *:syn-extend*
3860 The "keepend" behavior can be changed by using the "extend" argument.
3861 When an item with "extend" is contained in an item that uses
3862 "keepend", the "keepend" is ignored and the containing region will be
3863 extended.
3864 This can be used to have some contained items extend a region while
3865 others don't. Example: >
3866
3867 :syn region htmlRef start=+<a>+ end=+</a>+ keepend contains=htmlItem,htmlScript
3868 :syn match htmlItem +<[^>]*>+ contained
3869 :syn region htmlScript start=+<script+ end=+</script[^>]*>+ contained extend
3870
3871< Here the htmlItem item does not make the htmlRef item continue
3872 further, it is only used to highlight the <> items. The htmlScript
3873 item does extend the htmlRef item.
3874
3875 Another example: >
3876 :syn region xmlFold start="<a>" end="</a>" fold transparent keepend extend
3877< This defines a region with "keepend", so that its end cannot be
3878 changed by contained items, like when the "</a>" is matched to
3879 highlight it differently. But when the xmlFold region is nested (it
3880 includes itself), the "extend" applies, so that the "</a>" of a nested
3881 region only ends that region, and not the one it is contained in.
3882
3883 *:syn-excludenl*
3884 When a pattern for a match or end pattern of a region includes a '$'
3885 to match the end-of-line, it will make a region item that it is
3886 contained in continue on the next line. For example, a match with
3887 "\\$" (backslash at the end of the line) can make a region continue
3888 that would normally stop at the end of the line. This is the default
3889 behavior. If this is not wanted, there are two ways to avoid it:
3890 1. Use "keepend" for the containing item. This will keep all
3891 contained matches from extending the match or region. It can be
3892 used when all contained items must not extend the containing item.
3893 2. Use "excludenl" in the contained item. This will keep that match
3894 from extending the containing match or region. It can be used if
3895 only some contained items must not extend the containing item.
3896 "excludenl" must be given before the pattern it applies to.
3897
3898 *:syn-matchgroup*
3899 "matchgroup" can be used to highlight the start and/or end pattern
3900 differently than the body of the region. Example: >
3901 :syntax region String matchgroup=Quote start=+"+ skip=+\\"+ end=+"+
3902< This will highlight the quotes with the "Quote" group, and the text in
3903 between with the "String" group.
3904 The "matchgroup" is used for all start and end patterns that follow,
3905 until the next "matchgroup". Use "matchgroup=NONE" to go back to not
3906 using a matchgroup.
3907
3908 In a start or end pattern that is highlighted with "matchgroup" the
3909 contained items of the region are not used. This can be used to avoid
3910 that a contained item matches in the start or end pattern match. When
3911 using "transparent", this does not apply to a start or end pattern
3912 match that is highlighted with "matchgroup".
3913
3914 Here is an example, which highlights three levels of parentheses in
3915 different colors: >
3916 :sy region par1 matchgroup=par1 start=/(/ end=/)/ contains=par2
3917 :sy region par2 matchgroup=par2 start=/(/ end=/)/ contains=par3 contained
3918 :sy region par3 matchgroup=par3 start=/(/ end=/)/ contains=par1 contained
3919 :hi par1 ctermfg=red guifg=red
3920 :hi par2 ctermfg=blue guifg=blue
3921 :hi par3 ctermfg=darkgreen guifg=darkgreen
Bram Moolenaaradc21822011-04-01 18:03:16 +02003922<
3923 *E849*
3924The maximum number of syntax groups is 19999.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003925
3926==============================================================================
Bram Moolenaar9d87a372018-12-18 21:41:50 +010039277. :syntax arguments *:syn-arguments*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003928
3929The :syntax commands that define syntax items take a number of arguments.
3930The common ones are explained here. The arguments may be given in any order
3931and may be mixed with patterns.
3932
3933Not all commands accept all arguments. This table shows which arguments
3934can not be used for all commands:
Bram Moolenaar09092152010-08-08 16:38:42 +02003935 *E395*
Bram Moolenaar860cae12010-06-05 23:22:07 +02003936 contains oneline fold display extend concealends~
3937:syntax keyword - - - - - -
3938:syntax match yes - yes yes yes -
3939:syntax region yes yes yes yes yes yes
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003940
3941These arguments can be used for all three commands:
Bram Moolenaar860cae12010-06-05 23:22:07 +02003942 conceal
3943 cchar
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003944 contained
3945 containedin
3946 nextgroup
3947 transparent
3948 skipwhite
3949 skipnl
3950 skipempty
3951
Bram Moolenaar860cae12010-06-05 23:22:07 +02003952conceal *conceal* *:syn-conceal*
3953
3954When the "conceal" argument is given, the item is marked as concealable.
Bram Moolenaar370df582010-06-22 05:16:38 +02003955Whether or not it is actually concealed depends on the value of the
Bram Moolenaarf5963f72010-07-23 22:10:27 +02003956'conceallevel' option. The 'concealcursor' option is used to decide whether
3957concealable items in the current line are displayed unconcealed to be able to
3958edit the line.
Bram Moolenaardc1f1642016-08-16 18:33:43 +02003959Another way to conceal text is with |matchadd()|.
Bram Moolenaar860cae12010-06-05 23:22:07 +02003960
3961concealends *:syn-concealends*
3962
3963When the "concealends" argument is given, the start and end matches of
3964the region, but not the contents of the region, are marked as concealable.
3965Whether or not they are actually concealed depends on the setting on the
3966'conceallevel' option. The ends of a region can only be concealed separately
3967in this way when they have their own highlighting via "matchgroup"
3968
3969cchar *:syn-cchar*
Bram Moolenaard58e9292011-02-09 17:07:58 +01003970 *E844*
Bram Moolenaar860cae12010-06-05 23:22:07 +02003971The "cchar" argument defines the character shown in place of the item
3972when it is concealed (setting "cchar" only makes sense when the conceal
3973argument is given.) If "cchar" is not set then the default conceal
Bram Moolenaard58e9292011-02-09 17:07:58 +01003974character defined in the 'listchars' option is used. The character cannot be
3975a control character such as Tab. Example: >
Bram Moolenaar860cae12010-06-05 23:22:07 +02003976 :syntax match Entity "&amp;" conceal cchar=&
Bram Moolenaar9028b102010-07-11 16:58:51 +02003977See |hl-Conceal| for highlighting.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003978
3979contained *:syn-contained*
3980
3981When the "contained" argument is given, this item will not be recognized at
3982the top level, but only when it is mentioned in the "contains" field of
3983another match. Example: >
3984 :syntax keyword Todo TODO contained
3985 :syntax match Comment "//.*" contains=Todo
3986
3987
3988display *:syn-display*
3989
3990If the "display" argument is given, this item will be skipped when the
3991detected highlighting will not be displayed. This will speed up highlighting,
3992by skipping this item when only finding the syntax state for the text that is
3993to be displayed.
3994
3995Generally, you can use "display" for match and region items that meet these
3996conditions:
3997- The item does not continue past the end of a line. Example for C: A region
3998 for a "/*" comment can't contain "display", because it continues on the next
3999 line.
4000- The item does not contain items that continue past the end of the line or
4001 make it continue on the next line.
4002- The item does not change the size of any item it is contained in. Example
4003 for C: A match with "\\$" in a preprocessor match can't have "display",
4004 because it may make that preprocessor match shorter.
4005- The item does not allow other items to match that didn't match otherwise,
4006 and that item may extend the match too far. Example for C: A match for a
4007 "//" comment can't use "display", because a "/*" inside that comment would
4008 match then and start a comment which extends past the end of the line.
4009
4010Examples, for the C language, where "display" can be used:
4011- match with a number
4012- match with a label
4013
4014
4015transparent *:syn-transparent*
4016
4017If the "transparent" argument is given, this item will not be highlighted
4018itself, but will take the highlighting of the item it is contained in. This
4019is useful for syntax items that don't need any highlighting but are used
4020only to skip over a part of the text.
4021
4022The "contains=" argument is also inherited from the item it is contained in,
4023unless a "contains" argument is given for the transparent item itself. To
4024avoid that unwanted items are contained, use "contains=NONE". Example, which
4025highlights words in strings, but makes an exception for "vim": >
4026 :syn match myString /'[^']*'/ contains=myWord,myVim
4027 :syn match myWord /\<[a-z]*\>/ contained
4028 :syn match myVim /\<vim\>/ transparent contained contains=NONE
4029 :hi link myString String
4030 :hi link myWord Comment
4031Since the "myVim" match comes after "myWord" it is the preferred match (last
4032match in the same position overrules an earlier one). The "transparent"
4033argument makes the "myVim" match use the same highlighting as "myString". But
4034it does not contain anything. If the "contains=NONE" argument would be left
4035out, then "myVim" would use the contains argument from myString and allow
4036"myWord" to be contained, which will be highlighted as a Constant. This
4037happens because a contained match doesn't match inside itself in the same
4038position, thus the "myVim" match doesn't overrule the "myWord" match here.
4039
4040When you look at the colored text, it is like looking at layers of contained
4041items. The contained item is on top of the item it is contained in, thus you
4042see the contained item. When a contained item is transparent, you can look
4043through, thus you see the item it is contained in. In a picture:
4044
4045 look from here
4046
4047 | | | | | |
4048 V V V V V V
4049
4050 xxxx yyy more contained items
4051 .................... contained item (transparent)
4052 ============================= first item
4053
4054The 'x', 'y' and '=' represent a highlighted syntax item. The '.' represent a
4055transparent group.
4056
4057What you see is:
4058
4059 =======xxxx=======yyy========
4060
4061Thus you look through the transparent "....".
4062
4063
4064oneline *:syn-oneline*
4065
4066The "oneline" argument indicates that the region does not cross a line
4067boundary. It must match completely in the current line. However, when the
4068region has a contained item that does cross a line boundary, it continues on
4069the next line anyway. A contained item can be used to recognize a line
4070continuation pattern. But the "end" pattern must still match in the first
4071line, otherwise the region doesn't even start.
4072
4073When the start pattern includes a "\n" to match an end-of-line, the end
4074pattern must be found in the same line as where the start pattern ends. The
4075end pattern may also include an end-of-line. Thus the "oneline" argument
4076means that the end of the start pattern and the start of the end pattern must
4077be within one line. This can't be changed by a skip pattern that matches a
4078line break.
4079
4080
4081fold *:syn-fold*
4082
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00004083The "fold" argument makes the fold level increase by one for this item.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004084Example: >
4085 :syn region myFold start="{" end="}" transparent fold
4086 :syn sync fromstart
4087 :set foldmethod=syntax
4088This will make each {} block form one fold.
4089
4090The fold will start on the line where the item starts, and end where the item
4091ends. If the start and end are within the same line, there is no fold.
4092The 'foldnestmax' option limits the nesting of syntax folds.
4093{not available when Vim was compiled without |+folding| feature}
4094
4095
4096 *:syn-contains* *E405* *E406* *E407* *E408* *E409*
Bram Moolenaar3a991dd2014-10-02 01:41:41 +02004097contains={group-name},..
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004098
4099The "contains" argument is followed by a list of syntax group names. These
4100groups will be allowed to begin inside the item (they may extend past the
4101containing group's end). This allows for recursive nesting of matches and
4102regions. If there is no "contains" argument, no groups will be contained in
4103this item. The group names do not need to be defined before they can be used
4104here.
4105
4106contains=ALL
4107 If the only item in the contains list is "ALL", then all
4108 groups will be accepted inside the item.
4109
4110contains=ALLBUT,{group-name},..
4111 If the first item in the contains list is "ALLBUT", then all
4112 groups will be accepted inside the item, except the ones that
4113 are listed. Example: >
4114 :syntax region Block start="{" end="}" ... contains=ALLBUT,Function
4115
4116contains=TOP
4117 If the first item in the contains list is "TOP", then all
4118 groups will be accepted that don't have the "contained"
4119 argument.
4120contains=TOP,{group-name},..
4121 Like "TOP", but excluding the groups that are listed.
4122
4123contains=CONTAINED
4124 If the first item in the contains list is "CONTAINED", then
4125 all groups will be accepted that have the "contained"
4126 argument.
4127contains=CONTAINED,{group-name},..
4128 Like "CONTAINED", but excluding the groups that are
4129 listed.
4130
4131
4132The {group-name} in the "contains" list can be a pattern. All group names
4133that match the pattern will be included (or excluded, if "ALLBUT" is used).
4134The pattern cannot contain white space or a ','. Example: >
4135 ... contains=Comment.*,Keyw[0-3]
4136The matching will be done at moment the syntax command is executed. Groups
4137that are defined later will not be matched. Also, if the current syntax
4138command defines a new group, it is not matched. Be careful: When putting
4139syntax commands in a file you can't rely on groups NOT being defined, because
4140the file may have been sourced before, and ":syn clear" doesn't remove the
4141group names.
4142
4143The contained groups will also match in the start and end patterns of a
4144region. If this is not wanted, the "matchgroup" argument can be used
4145|:syn-matchgroup|. The "ms=" and "me=" offsets can be used to change the
4146region where contained items do match. Note that this may also limit the
4147area that is highlighted
4148
4149
Bram Moolenaar3a991dd2014-10-02 01:41:41 +02004150containedin={group-name}... *:syn-containedin*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004151
4152The "containedin" argument is followed by a list of syntax group names. The
4153item will be allowed to begin inside these groups. This works as if the
4154containing item has a "contains=" argument that includes this item.
4155
Bram Moolenaar3a991dd2014-10-02 01:41:41 +02004156The {group-name}... can be used just like for "contains", as explained above.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004157
4158This is useful when adding a syntax item afterwards. An item can be told to
4159be included inside an already existing item, without changing the definition
4160of that item. For example, to highlight a word in a C comment after loading
4161the C syntax: >
4162 :syn keyword myword HELP containedin=cComment contained
4163Note that "contained" is also used, to avoid that the item matches at the top
4164level.
4165
4166Matches for "containedin" are added to the other places where the item can
4167appear. A "contains" argument may also be added as usual. Don't forget that
4168keywords never contain another item, thus adding them to "containedin" won't
4169work.
4170
4171
Bram Moolenaar3a991dd2014-10-02 01:41:41 +02004172nextgroup={group-name},.. *:syn-nextgroup*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004173
4174The "nextgroup" argument is followed by a list of syntax group names,
4175separated by commas (just like with "contains", so you can also use patterns).
4176
4177If the "nextgroup" argument is given, the mentioned syntax groups will be
4178tried for a match, after the match or region ends. If none of the groups have
4179a match, highlighting continues normally. If there is a match, this group
4180will be used, even when it is not mentioned in the "contains" field of the
4181current group. This is like giving the mentioned group priority over all
4182other groups. Example: >
4183 :syntax match ccFoobar "Foo.\{-}Bar" contains=ccFoo
4184 :syntax match ccFoo "Foo" contained nextgroup=ccFiller
4185 :syntax region ccFiller start="." matchgroup=ccBar end="Bar" contained
4186
4187This will highlight "Foo" and "Bar" differently, and only when there is a
4188"Bar" after "Foo". In the text line below, "f" shows where ccFoo is used for
4189highlighting, and "bbb" where ccBar is used. >
4190
4191 Foo asdfasd Bar asdf Foo asdf Bar asdf
4192 fff bbb fff bbb
4193
4194Note the use of ".\{-}" to skip as little as possible until the next Bar.
4195when ".*" would be used, the "asdf" in between "Bar" and "Foo" would be
4196highlighted according to the "ccFoobar" group, because the ccFooBar match
4197would include the first "Foo" and the last "Bar" in the line (see |pattern|).
4198
4199
4200skipwhite *:syn-skipwhite*
4201skipnl *:syn-skipnl*
4202skipempty *:syn-skipempty*
4203
4204These arguments are only used in combination with "nextgroup". They can be
4205used to allow the next group to match after skipping some text:
Bram Moolenaardd2a0d82007-05-12 15:07:00 +00004206 skipwhite skip over space and tab characters
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004207 skipnl skip over the end of a line
4208 skipempty skip over empty lines (implies a "skipnl")
4209
4210When "skipwhite" is present, the white space is only skipped if there is no
4211next group that matches the white space.
4212
4213When "skipnl" is present, the match with nextgroup may be found in the next
4214line. This only happens when the current item ends at the end of the current
4215line! When "skipnl" is not present, the nextgroup will only be found after
4216the current item in the same line.
4217
4218When skipping text while looking for a next group, the matches for other
4219groups are ignored. Only when no next group matches, other items are tried
4220for a match again. This means that matching a next group and skipping white
4221space and <EOL>s has a higher priority than other items.
4222
4223Example: >
4224 :syn match ifstart "\<if.*" nextgroup=ifline skipwhite skipempty
4225 :syn match ifline "[^ \t].*" nextgroup=ifline skipwhite skipempty contained
4226 :syn match ifline "endif" contained
4227Note that the "[^ \t].*" match matches all non-white text. Thus it would also
4228match "endif". Therefore the "endif" match is put last, so that it takes
4229precedence.
4230Note that this example doesn't work for nested "if"s. You need to add
4231"contains" arguments to make that work (omitted for simplicity of the
4232example).
4233
Bram Moolenaar860cae12010-06-05 23:22:07 +02004234IMPLICIT CONCEAL *:syn-conceal-implicit*
4235
4236:sy[ntax] conceal [on|off]
4237 This defines if the following ":syntax" commands will define keywords,
4238 matches or regions with the "conceal" flag set. After ":syn conceal
4239 on", all subsequent ":syn keyword", ":syn match" or ":syn region"
4240 defined will have the "conceal" flag set implicitly. ":syn conceal
4241 off" returns to the normal state where the "conceal" flag must be
4242 given explicitly.
4243
Bram Moolenaar690afe12017-01-28 18:34:47 +01004244:sy[ntax] conceal
4245 Show either "syntax conceal on" or "syntax conceal off" (translated).
4246
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004247==============================================================================
Bram Moolenaar9d87a372018-12-18 21:41:50 +010042488. Syntax patterns *:syn-pattern* *E401* *E402*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004249
4250In the syntax commands, a pattern must be surrounded by two identical
4251characters. This is like it works for the ":s" command. The most common to
4252use is the double quote. But if the pattern contains a double quote, you can
4253use another character that is not used in the pattern. Examples: >
4254 :syntax region Comment start="/\*" end="\*/"
4255 :syntax region String start=+"+ end=+"+ skip=+\\"+
4256
4257See |pattern| for the explanation of what a pattern is. Syntax patterns are
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00004258always interpreted like the 'magic' option is set, no matter what the actual
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004259value of 'magic' is. And the patterns are interpreted like the 'l' flag is
4260not included in 'cpoptions'. This was done to make syntax files portable and
4261independent of 'compatible' and 'magic' settings.
4262
4263Try to avoid patterns that can match an empty string, such as "[a-z]*".
4264This slows down the highlighting a lot, because it matches everywhere.
4265
4266 *:syn-pattern-offset*
4267The pattern can be followed by a character offset. This can be used to
4268change the highlighted part, and to change the text area included in the
4269match or region (which only matters when trying to match other items). Both
4270are relative to the matched pattern. The character offset for a skip
4271pattern can be used to tell where to continue looking for an end pattern.
4272
4273The offset takes the form of "{what}={offset}"
4274The {what} can be one of seven strings:
4275
4276ms Match Start offset for the start of the matched text
4277me Match End offset for the end of the matched text
4278hs Highlight Start offset for where the highlighting starts
4279he Highlight End offset for where the highlighting ends
4280rs Region Start offset for where the body of a region starts
4281re Region End offset for where the body of a region ends
4282lc Leading Context offset past "leading context" of pattern
4283
4284The {offset} can be:
4285
4286s start of the matched pattern
4287s+{nr} start of the matched pattern plus {nr} chars to the right
4288s-{nr} start of the matched pattern plus {nr} chars to the left
4289e end of the matched pattern
4290e+{nr} end of the matched pattern plus {nr} chars to the right
4291e-{nr} end of the matched pattern plus {nr} chars to the left
Bram Moolenaarac7bd632013-03-19 11:35:58 +01004292{nr} (for "lc" only): start matching {nr} chars right of the start
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004293
4294Examples: "ms=s+1", "hs=e-2", "lc=3".
4295
4296Although all offsets are accepted after any pattern, they are not always
4297meaningful. This table shows which offsets are actually used:
4298
4299 ms me hs he rs re lc ~
4300match item yes yes yes yes - - yes
4301region item start yes - yes - yes - yes
4302region item skip - yes - - - - yes
4303region item end - yes - yes - yes yes
4304
4305Offsets can be concatenated, with a ',' in between. Example: >
4306 :syn match String /"[^"]*"/hs=s+1,he=e-1
4307<
4308 some "string" text
4309 ^^^^^^ highlighted
4310
4311Notes:
4312- There must be no white space between the pattern and the character
4313 offset(s).
4314- The highlighted area will never be outside of the matched text.
4315- A negative offset for an end pattern may not always work, because the end
4316 pattern may be detected when the highlighting should already have stopped.
Bram Moolenaar8f3f58f2010-01-06 20:52:26 +01004317- Before Vim 7.2 the offsets were counted in bytes instead of characters.
4318 This didn't work well for multi-byte characters, so it was changed with the
4319 Vim 7.2 release.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004320- The start of a match cannot be in a line other than where the pattern
4321 matched. This doesn't work: "a\nb"ms=e. You can make the highlighting
4322 start in another line, this does work: "a\nb"hs=e.
4323
4324Example (match a comment but don't highlight the /* and */): >
4325 :syntax region Comment start="/\*"hs=e+1 end="\*/"he=s-1
4326<
4327 /* this is a comment */
4328 ^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^ highlighted
4329
4330A more complicated Example: >
4331 :syn region Exa matchgroup=Foo start="foo"hs=s+2,rs=e+2 matchgroup=Bar end="bar"me=e-1,he=e-1,re=s-1
4332<
4333 abcfoostringbarabc
4334 mmmmmmmmmmm match
Bram Moolenaar4770d092006-01-12 23:22:24 +00004335 sssrrreee highlight start/region/end ("Foo", "Exa" and "Bar")
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004336
4337Leading context *:syn-lc* *:syn-leading* *:syn-context*
4338
4339Note: This is an obsolete feature, only included for backwards compatibility
4340with previous Vim versions. It's now recommended to use the |/\@<=| construct
4341in the pattern.
4342
4343The "lc" offset specifies leading context -- a part of the pattern that must
4344be present, but is not considered part of the match. An offset of "lc=n" will
4345cause Vim to step back n columns before attempting the pattern match, allowing
4346characters which have already been matched in previous patterns to also be
4347used as leading context for this match. This can be used, for instance, to
4348specify that an "escaping" character must not precede the match: >
4349
4350 :syn match ZNoBackslash "[^\\]z"ms=s+1
4351 :syn match WNoBackslash "[^\\]w"lc=1
4352 :syn match Underline "_\+"
4353<
4354 ___zzzz ___wwww
4355 ^^^ ^^^ matches Underline
4356 ^ ^ matches ZNoBackslash
4357 ^^^^ matches WNoBackslash
4358
4359The "ms" offset is automatically set to the same value as the "lc" offset,
4360unless you set "ms" explicitly.
4361
4362
4363Multi-line patterns *:syn-multi-line*
4364
4365The patterns can include "\n" to match an end-of-line. Mostly this works as
4366expected, but there are a few exceptions.
4367
4368When using a start pattern with an offset, the start of the match is not
4369allowed to start in a following line. The highlighting can start in a
Bram Moolenaar8f3f58f2010-01-06 20:52:26 +01004370following line though. Using the "\zs" item also requires that the start of
4371the match doesn't move to another line.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004372
4373The skip pattern can include the "\n", but the search for an end pattern will
4374continue in the first character of the next line, also when that character is
4375matched by the skip pattern. This is because redrawing may start in any line
4376halfway a region and there is no check if the skip pattern started in a
4377previous line. For example, if the skip pattern is "a\nb" and an end pattern
4378is "b", the end pattern does match in the second line of this: >
4379 x x a
4380 b x x
4381Generally this means that the skip pattern should not match any characters
4382after the "\n".
4383
4384
4385External matches *:syn-ext-match*
4386
4387These extra regular expression items are available in region patterns:
4388
Bram Moolenaar203d04d2013-06-06 21:36:40 +02004389 */\z(* */\z(\)* *E50* *E52* *E879*
Bram Moolenaara3e6bc92013-01-30 14:18:00 +01004390 \z(\) Marks the sub-expression as "external", meaning that it can be
4391 accessed from another pattern match. Currently only usable in
4392 defining a syntax region start pattern.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004393
4394 */\z1* */\z2* */\z3* */\z4* */\z5*
4395 \z1 ... \z9 */\z6* */\z7* */\z8* */\z9* *E66* *E67*
4396 Matches the same string that was matched by the corresponding
4397 sub-expression in a previous start pattern match.
4398
4399Sometimes the start and end patterns of a region need to share a common
4400sub-expression. A common example is the "here" document in Perl and many Unix
4401shells. This effect can be achieved with the "\z" special regular expression
4402items, which marks a sub-expression as "external", in the sense that it can be
4403referenced from outside the pattern in which it is defined. The here-document
4404example, for instance, can be done like this: >
4405 :syn region hereDoc start="<<\z(\I\i*\)" end="^\z1$"
4406
4407As can be seen here, the \z actually does double duty. In the start pattern,
4408it marks the "\(\I\i*\)" sub-expression as external; in the end pattern, it
Bram Moolenaarb4ff5182015-11-10 21:15:48 +01004409changes the \z1 back-reference into an external reference referring to the
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004410first external sub-expression in the start pattern. External references can
4411also be used in skip patterns: >
4412 :syn region foo start="start \(\I\i*\)" skip="not end \z1" end="end \z1"
4413
4414Note that normal and external sub-expressions are completely orthogonal and
4415indexed separately; for instance, if the pattern "\z(..\)\(..\)" is applied
4416to the string "aabb", then \1 will refer to "bb" and \z1 will refer to "aa".
4417Note also that external sub-expressions cannot be accessed as back-references
4418within the same pattern like normal sub-expressions. If you want to use one
4419sub-expression as both a normal and an external sub-expression, you can nest
4420the two, as in "\(\z(...\)\)".
4421
4422Note that only matches within a single line can be used. Multi-line matches
4423cannot be referred to.
4424
4425==============================================================================
Bram Moolenaar9d87a372018-12-18 21:41:50 +010044269. Syntax clusters *:syn-cluster* *E400*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004427
4428:sy[ntax] cluster {cluster-name} [contains={group-name}..]
4429 [add={group-name}..]
4430 [remove={group-name}..]
4431
4432This command allows you to cluster a list of syntax groups together under a
4433single name.
4434
4435 contains={group-name}..
4436 The cluster is set to the specified list of groups.
4437 add={group-name}..
4438 The specified groups are added to the cluster.
4439 remove={group-name}..
4440 The specified groups are removed from the cluster.
4441
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00004442A cluster so defined may be referred to in a contains=.., containedin=..,
4443nextgroup=.., add=.. or remove=.. list with a "@" prefix. You can also use
4444this notation to implicitly declare a cluster before specifying its contents.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004445
4446Example: >
4447 :syntax match Thing "# [^#]\+ #" contains=@ThingMembers
4448 :syntax cluster ThingMembers contains=ThingMember1,ThingMember2
4449
4450As the previous example suggests, modifications to a cluster are effectively
4451retroactive; the membership of the cluster is checked at the last minute, so
4452to speak: >
4453 :syntax keyword A aaa
4454 :syntax keyword B bbb
4455 :syntax cluster AandB contains=A
4456 :syntax match Stuff "( aaa bbb )" contains=@AandB
4457 :syntax cluster AandB add=B " now both keywords are matched in Stuff
4458
4459This also has implications for nested clusters: >
4460 :syntax keyword A aaa
4461 :syntax keyword B bbb
4462 :syntax cluster SmallGroup contains=B
4463 :syntax cluster BigGroup contains=A,@SmallGroup
4464 :syntax match Stuff "( aaa bbb )" contains=@BigGroup
4465 :syntax cluster BigGroup remove=B " no effect, since B isn't in BigGroup
4466 :syntax cluster SmallGroup remove=B " now bbb isn't matched within Stuff
Bram Moolenaaradc21822011-04-01 18:03:16 +02004467<
4468 *E848*
4469The maximum number of clusters is 9767.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004470
4471==============================================================================
Bram Moolenaar9d87a372018-12-18 21:41:50 +0100447210. Including syntax files *:syn-include* *E397*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004473
4474It is often useful for one language's syntax file to include a syntax file for
4475a related language. Depending on the exact relationship, this can be done in
4476two different ways:
4477
4478 - If top-level syntax items in the included syntax file are to be
4479 allowed at the top level in the including syntax, you can simply use
4480 the |:runtime| command: >
4481
4482 " In cpp.vim:
4483 :runtime! syntax/c.vim
4484 :unlet b:current_syntax
4485
4486< - If top-level syntax items in the included syntax file are to be
4487 contained within a region in the including syntax, you can use the
4488 ":syntax include" command:
4489
4490:sy[ntax] include [@{grouplist-name}] {file-name}
4491
4492 All syntax items declared in the included file will have the
4493 "contained" flag added. In addition, if a group list is specified,
4494 all top-level syntax items in the included file will be added to
4495 that list. >
4496
4497 " In perl.vim:
4498 :syntax include @Pod <sfile>:p:h/pod.vim
4499 :syntax region perlPOD start="^=head" end="^=cut" contains=@Pod
4500<
4501 When {file-name} is an absolute path (starts with "/", "c:", "$VAR"
4502 or "<sfile>") that file is sourced. When it is a relative path
4503 (e.g., "syntax/pod.vim") the file is searched for in 'runtimepath'.
4504 All matching files are loaded. Using a relative path is
4505 recommended, because it allows a user to replace the included file
4506 with his own version, without replacing the file that does the ":syn
4507 include".
4508
Bram Moolenaaradc21822011-04-01 18:03:16 +02004509 *E847*
4510The maximum number of includes is 999.
4511
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004512==============================================================================
Bram Moolenaar9d87a372018-12-18 21:41:50 +0100451311. Synchronizing *:syn-sync* *E403* *E404*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004514
4515Vim wants to be able to start redrawing in any position in the document. To
4516make this possible it needs to know the syntax state at the position where
4517redrawing starts.
4518
4519:sy[ntax] sync [ccomment [group-name] | minlines={N} | ...]
4520
4521There are four ways to synchronize:
45221. Always parse from the start of the file.
4523 |:syn-sync-first|
45242. Based on C-style comments. Vim understands how C-comments work and can
4525 figure out if the current line starts inside or outside a comment.
4526 |:syn-sync-second|
45273. Jumping back a certain number of lines and start parsing there.
4528 |:syn-sync-third|
45294. Searching backwards in the text for a pattern to sync on.
4530 |:syn-sync-fourth|
4531
4532 *:syn-sync-maxlines* *:syn-sync-minlines*
4533For the last three methods, the line range where the parsing can start is
4534limited by "minlines" and "maxlines".
4535
4536If the "minlines={N}" argument is given, the parsing always starts at least
4537that many lines backwards. This can be used if the parsing may take a few
4538lines before it's correct, or when it's not possible to use syncing.
4539
4540If the "maxlines={N}" argument is given, the number of lines that are searched
4541for a comment or syncing pattern is restricted to N lines backwards (after
4542adding "minlines"). This is useful if you have few things to sync on and a
4543slow machine. Example: >
Bram Moolenaar2b8388b2015-02-28 13:11:45 +01004544 :syntax sync maxlines=500 ccomment
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004545<
4546 *:syn-sync-linebreaks*
4547When using a pattern that matches multiple lines, a change in one line may
4548cause a pattern to no longer match in a previous line. This means has to
4549start above where the change was made. How many lines can be specified with
4550the "linebreaks" argument. For example, when a pattern may include one line
4551break use this: >
4552 :syntax sync linebreaks=1
4553The result is that redrawing always starts at least one line before where a
4554change was made. The default value for "linebreaks" is zero. Usually the
4555value for "minlines" is bigger than "linebreaks".
4556
4557
4558First syncing method: *:syn-sync-first*
4559>
4560 :syntax sync fromstart
4561
4562The file will be parsed from the start. This makes syntax highlighting
4563accurate, but can be slow for long files. Vim caches previously parsed text,
4564so that it's only slow when parsing the text for the first time. However,
Bram Moolenaarf1568ec2011-12-14 21:17:39 +01004565when making changes some part of the text needs to be parsed again (worst
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004566case: to the end of the file).
4567
4568Using "fromstart" is equivalent to using "minlines" with a very large number.
4569
4570
4571Second syncing method: *:syn-sync-second* *:syn-sync-ccomment*
4572
4573For the second method, only the "ccomment" argument needs to be given.
4574Example: >
4575 :syntax sync ccomment
4576
4577When Vim finds that the line where displaying starts is inside a C-style
4578comment, the last region syntax item with the group-name "Comment" will be
4579used. This requires that there is a region with the group-name "Comment"!
4580An alternate group name can be specified, for example: >
4581 :syntax sync ccomment javaComment
4582This means that the last item specified with "syn region javaComment" will be
4583used for the detected C comment region. This only works properly if that
4584region does have a start pattern "\/*" and an end pattern "*\/".
4585
4586The "maxlines" argument can be used to restrict the search to a number of
4587lines. The "minlines" argument can be used to at least start a number of
4588lines back (e.g., for when there is some construct that only takes a few
4589lines, but it hard to sync on).
4590
4591Note: Syncing on a C comment doesn't work properly when strings are used
4592that cross a line and contain a "*/". Since letting strings cross a line
4593is a bad programming habit (many compilers give a warning message), and the
4594chance of a "*/" appearing inside a comment is very small, this restriction
4595is hardly ever noticed.
4596
4597
4598Third syncing method: *:syn-sync-third*
4599
4600For the third method, only the "minlines={N}" argument needs to be given.
4601Vim will subtract {N} from the line number and start parsing there. This
4602means {N} extra lines need to be parsed, which makes this method a bit slower.
4603Example: >
4604 :syntax sync minlines=50
4605
4606"lines" is equivalent to "minlines" (used by older versions).
4607
4608
4609Fourth syncing method: *:syn-sync-fourth*
4610
4611The idea is to synchronize on the end of a few specific regions, called a
4612sync pattern. Only regions can cross lines, so when we find the end of some
4613region, we might be able to know in which syntax item we are. The search
4614starts in the line just above the one where redrawing starts. From there
4615the search continues backwards in the file.
4616
4617This works just like the non-syncing syntax items. You can use contained
4618matches, nextgroup, etc. But there are a few differences:
4619- Keywords cannot be used.
4620- The syntax items with the "sync" keyword form a completely separated group
4621 of syntax items. You can't mix syncing groups and non-syncing groups.
4622- The matching works backwards in the buffer (line by line), instead of
4623 forwards.
4624- A line continuation pattern can be given. It is used to decide which group
4625 of lines need to be searched like they were one line. This means that the
4626 search for a match with the specified items starts in the first of the
4627 consecutive that contain the continuation pattern.
4628- When using "nextgroup" or "contains", this only works within one line (or
4629 group of continued lines).
4630- When using a region, it must start and end in the same line (or group of
4631 continued lines). Otherwise the end is assumed to be at the end of the
4632 line (or group of continued lines).
4633- When a match with a sync pattern is found, the rest of the line (or group of
4634 continued lines) is searched for another match. The last match is used.
4635 This is used when a line can contain both the start end the end of a region
4636 (e.g., in a C-comment like /* this */, the last "*/" is used).
4637
4638There are two ways how a match with a sync pattern can be used:
46391. Parsing for highlighting starts where redrawing starts (and where the
4640 search for the sync pattern started). The syntax group that is expected
4641 to be valid there must be specified. This works well when the regions
4642 that cross lines cannot contain other regions.
46432. Parsing for highlighting continues just after the match. The syntax group
4644 that is expected to be present just after the match must be specified.
4645 This can be used when the previous method doesn't work well. It's much
4646 slower, because more text needs to be parsed.
4647Both types of sync patterns can be used at the same time.
4648
4649Besides the sync patterns, other matches and regions can be specified, to
4650avoid finding unwanted matches.
4651
4652[The reason that the sync patterns are given separately, is that mostly the
4653search for the sync point can be much simpler than figuring out the
4654highlighting. The reduced number of patterns means it will go (much)
4655faster.]
4656
4657 *syn-sync-grouphere* *E393* *E394*
4658 :syntax sync match {sync-group-name} grouphere {group-name} "pattern" ..
4659
4660 Define a match that is used for syncing. {group-name} is the
4661 name of a syntax group that follows just after the match. Parsing
4662 of the text for highlighting starts just after the match. A region
4663 must exist for this {group-name}. The first one defined will be used.
4664 "NONE" can be used for when there is no syntax group after the match.
4665
4666 *syn-sync-groupthere*
4667 :syntax sync match {sync-group-name} groupthere {group-name} "pattern" ..
4668
4669 Like "grouphere", but {group-name} is the name of a syntax group that
4670 is to be used at the start of the line where searching for the sync
4671 point started. The text between the match and the start of the sync
4672 pattern searching is assumed not to change the syntax highlighting.
4673 For example, in C you could search backwards for "/*" and "*/". If
4674 "/*" is found first, you know that you are inside a comment, so the
4675 "groupthere" is "cComment". If "*/" is found first, you know that you
4676 are not in a comment, so the "groupthere" is "NONE". (in practice
4677 it's a bit more complicated, because the "/*" and "*/" could appear
4678 inside a string. That's left as an exercise to the reader...).
4679
4680 :syntax sync match ..
4681 :syntax sync region ..
4682
4683 Without a "groupthere" argument. Define a region or match that is
4684 skipped while searching for a sync point.
4685
Bram Moolenaarc9b4b052006-04-30 18:54:39 +00004686 *syn-sync-linecont*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004687 :syntax sync linecont {pattern}
4688
4689 When {pattern} matches in a line, it is considered to continue in
4690 the next line. This means that the search for a sync point will
4691 consider the lines to be concatenated.
4692
4693If the "maxlines={N}" argument is given too, the number of lines that are
4694searched for a match is restricted to N. This is useful if you have very
4695few things to sync on and a slow machine. Example: >
4696 :syntax sync maxlines=100
4697
4698You can clear all sync settings with: >
4699 :syntax sync clear
4700
4701You can clear specific sync patterns with: >
4702 :syntax sync clear {sync-group-name} ..
4703
4704==============================================================================
Bram Moolenaar9d87a372018-12-18 21:41:50 +0100470512. Listing syntax items *:syntax* *:sy* *:syn* *:syn-list*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004706
Bram Moolenaar482aaeb2005-09-29 18:26:07 +00004707This command lists all the syntax items: >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004708
4709 :sy[ntax] [list]
4710
4711To show the syntax items for one syntax group: >
4712
4713 :sy[ntax] list {group-name}
4714
Bram Moolenaar24ea3ba2010-09-19 19:01:21 +02004715To list the syntax groups in one cluster: *E392* >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004716
4717 :sy[ntax] list @{cluster-name}
4718
4719See above for other arguments for the ":syntax" command.
4720
4721Note that the ":syntax" command can be abbreviated to ":sy", although ":syn"
4722is mostly used, because it looks better.
4723
4724==============================================================================
Bram Moolenaar9d87a372018-12-18 21:41:50 +0100472513. Highlight command *:highlight* *:hi* *E28* *E411* *E415*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004726
4727There are three types of highlight groups:
4728- The ones used for specific languages. For these the name starts with the
4729 name of the language. Many of these don't have any attributes, but are
4730 linked to a group of the second type.
4731- The ones used for all syntax languages.
4732- The ones used for the 'highlight' option.
4733 *hitest.vim*
4734You can see all the groups currently active with this command: >
4735 :so $VIMRUNTIME/syntax/hitest.vim
4736This will open a new window containing all highlight group names, displayed
4737in their own color.
4738
4739 *:colo* *:colorscheme* *E185*
Bram Moolenaar00a927d2010-05-14 23:24:24 +02004740:colo[rscheme] Output the name of the currently active color scheme.
4741 This is basically the same as >
4742 :echo g:colors_name
4743< In case g:colors_name has not been defined :colo will
4744 output "default". When compiled without the |+eval|
4745 feature it will output "unknown".
4746
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004747:colo[rscheme] {name} Load color scheme {name}. This searches 'runtimepath'
Bram Moolenaarbc488a72013-07-05 21:01:22 +02004748 for the file "colors/{name}.vim". The first one that
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004749 is found is loaded.
Bram Moolenaare18c0b32016-03-20 21:08:34 +01004750 Also searches all plugins in 'packpath', first below
4751 "start" and then under "opt".
4752
Bram Moolenaar8f3f58f2010-01-06 20:52:26 +01004753 Doesn't work recursively, thus you can't use
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004754 ":colorscheme" in a color scheme script.
Bram Moolenaarb4ada792016-10-30 21:55:26 +01004755
Bram Moolenaar723dd942019-04-04 13:11:03 +02004756 To customize a color scheme use another name, e.g.
Bram Moolenaarb4ada792016-10-30 21:55:26 +01004757 "~/.vim/colors/mine.vim", and use `:runtime` to load
Bram Moolenaar723dd942019-04-04 13:11:03 +02004758 the original color scheme: >
Bram Moolenaarb4ada792016-10-30 21:55:26 +01004759 runtime colors/evening.vim
4760 hi Statement ctermfg=Blue guifg=Blue
4761
Bram Moolenaar15142e22018-04-30 22:19:58 +02004762< Before the color scheme will be loaded the
4763 |ColorSchemePre| autocommand event is triggered.
4764 After the color scheme has been loaded the
Bram Moolenaarcfbc5ee2004-07-02 15:38:35 +00004765 |ColorScheme| autocommand event is triggered.
Bram Moolenaar723dd942019-04-04 13:11:03 +02004766 For info about writing a color scheme file: >
Bram Moolenaard4755bb2004-09-02 19:12:26 +00004767 :edit $VIMRUNTIME/colors/README.txt
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004768
4769:hi[ghlight] List all the current highlight groups that have
4770 attributes set.
4771
4772:hi[ghlight] {group-name}
4773 List one highlight group.
4774
4775:hi[ghlight] clear Reset all highlighting to the defaults. Removes all
4776 highlighting for groups added by the user!
4777 Uses the current value of 'background' to decide which
4778 default colors to use.
4779
4780:hi[ghlight] clear {group-name}
4781:hi[ghlight] {group-name} NONE
4782 Disable the highlighting for one highlight group. It
4783 is _not_ set back to the default colors.
4784
4785:hi[ghlight] [default] {group-name} {key}={arg} ..
4786 Add a highlight group, or change the highlighting for
4787 an existing group.
4788 See |highlight-args| for the {key}={arg} arguments.
4789 See |:highlight-default| for the optional [default]
4790 argument.
4791
4792Normally a highlight group is added once when starting up. This sets the
4793default values for the highlighting. After that, you can use additional
4794highlight commands to change the arguments that you want to set to non-default
4795values. The value "NONE" can be used to switch the value off or go back to
4796the default value.
4797
4798A simple way to change colors is with the |:colorscheme| command. This loads
4799a file with ":highlight" commands such as this: >
4800
4801 :hi Comment gui=bold
4802
4803Note that all settings that are not included remain the same, only the
4804specified field is used, and settings are merged with previous ones. So, the
4805result is like this single command has been used: >
4806 :hi Comment term=bold ctermfg=Cyan guifg=#80a0ff gui=bold
4807<
Bram Moolenaarc9b4b052006-04-30 18:54:39 +00004808 *:highlight-verbose*
Bram Moolenaar661b1822005-07-28 22:36:45 +00004809When listing a highlight group and 'verbose' is non-zero, the listing will
4810also tell where it was last set. Example: >
4811 :verbose hi Comment
4812< Comment xxx term=bold ctermfg=4 guifg=Blue ~
Bram Moolenaarc9b4b052006-04-30 18:54:39 +00004813 Last set from /home/mool/vim/vim7/runtime/syntax/syncolor.vim ~
Bram Moolenaar661b1822005-07-28 22:36:45 +00004814
Bram Moolenaar8aff23a2005-08-19 20:40:30 +00004815When ":hi clear" is used then the script where this command is used will be
4816mentioned for the default values. See |:verbose-cmd| for more information.
Bram Moolenaar661b1822005-07-28 22:36:45 +00004817
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004818 *highlight-args* *E416* *E417* *E423*
4819There are three types of terminals for highlighting:
4820term a normal terminal (vt100, xterm)
4821cterm a color terminal (MS-DOS console, color-xterm, these have the "Co"
4822 termcap entry)
4823gui the GUI
4824
4825For each type the highlighting can be given. This makes it possible to use
4826the same syntax file on all terminals, and use the optimal highlighting.
4827
48281. highlight arguments for normal terminals
4829
Bram Moolenaar75c50c42005-06-04 22:06:24 +00004830 *bold* *underline* *undercurl*
4831 *inverse* *italic* *standout*
Bram Moolenaarcf4b00c2017-09-02 18:33:56 +02004832 *nocombine* *strikethrough*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004833term={attr-list} *attr-list* *highlight-term* *E418*
4834 attr-list is a comma separated list (without spaces) of the
4835 following items (in any order):
4836 bold
4837 underline
Bram Moolenaar5409c052005-03-18 20:27:04 +00004838 undercurl not always available
Bram Moolenaarcf4b00c2017-09-02 18:33:56 +02004839 strikethrough not always available
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004840 reverse
4841 inverse same as reverse
4842 italic
4843 standout
Bram Moolenaar0cd2a942017-08-12 15:12:30 +02004844 nocombine override attributes instead of combining them
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004845 NONE no attributes used (used to reset it)
4846
4847 Note that "bold" can be used here and by using a bold font. They
4848 have the same effect.
Bram Moolenaar5409c052005-03-18 20:27:04 +00004849 "undercurl" is a curly underline. When "undercurl" is not possible
Bram Moolenaarcf4b00c2017-09-02 18:33:56 +02004850 then "underline" is used. In general "undercurl" and "strikethrough"
4851 is only available in the GUI. The color is set with |highlight-guisp|.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004852
4853start={term-list} *highlight-start* *E422*
4854stop={term-list} *term-list* *highlight-stop*
4855 These lists of terminal codes can be used to get
4856 non-standard attributes on a terminal.
4857
4858 The escape sequence specified with the "start" argument
4859 is written before the characters in the highlighted
4860 area. It can be anything that you want to send to the
4861 terminal to highlight this area. The escape sequence
4862 specified with the "stop" argument is written after the
4863 highlighted area. This should undo the "start" argument.
4864 Otherwise the screen will look messed up.
4865
4866 The {term-list} can have two forms:
4867
4868 1. A string with escape sequences.
4869 This is any string of characters, except that it can't start with
4870 "t_" and blanks are not allowed. The <> notation is recognized
4871 here, so you can use things like "<Esc>" and "<Space>". Example:
4872 start=<Esc>[27h;<Esc>[<Space>r;
4873
4874 2. A list of terminal codes.
4875 Each terminal code has the form "t_xx", where "xx" is the name of
4876 the termcap entry. The codes have to be separated with commas.
4877 White space is not allowed. Example:
4878 start=t_C1,t_BL
4879 The terminal codes must exist for this to work.
4880
4881
48822. highlight arguments for color terminals
4883
4884cterm={attr-list} *highlight-cterm*
4885 See above for the description of {attr-list} |attr-list|.
4886 The "cterm" argument is likely to be different from "term", when
4887 colors are used. For example, in a normal terminal comments could
4888 be underlined, in a color terminal they can be made Blue.
Bram Moolenaar68e65602019-05-26 21:33:31 +02004889 Note: Some terminals (e.g., DOS console) can't mix these attributes
4890 with coloring. To be portable, use only one of "cterm=" OR "ctermfg="
4891 OR "ctermbg=".
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004892
4893ctermfg={color-nr} *highlight-ctermfg* *E421*
4894ctermbg={color-nr} *highlight-ctermbg*
4895 The {color-nr} argument is a color number. Its range is zero to
4896 (not including) the number given by the termcap entry "Co".
4897 The actual color with this number depends on the type of terminal
4898 and its settings. Sometimes the color also depends on the settings of
4899 "cterm". For example, on some systems "cterm=bold ctermfg=3" gives
4900 another color, on others you just get color 3.
4901
4902 For an xterm this depends on your resources, and is a bit
4903 unpredictable. See your xterm documentation for the defaults. The
4904 colors for a color-xterm can be changed from the .Xdefaults file.
4905 Unfortunately this means that it's not possible to get the same colors
4906 for each user. See |xterm-color| for info about color xterms.
4907
4908 The MSDOS standard colors are fixed (in a console window), so these
4909 have been used for the names. But the meaning of color names in X11
4910 are fixed, so these color settings have been used, to make the
4911 highlighting settings portable (complicated, isn't it?). The
4912 following names are recognized, with the color number used:
4913
4914 *cterm-colors*
4915 NR-16 NR-8 COLOR NAME ~
4916 0 0 Black
4917 1 4 DarkBlue
4918 2 2 DarkGreen
4919 3 6 DarkCyan
4920 4 1 DarkRed
4921 5 5 DarkMagenta
4922 6 3 Brown, DarkYellow
4923 7 7 LightGray, LightGrey, Gray, Grey
4924 8 0* DarkGray, DarkGrey
4925 9 4* Blue, LightBlue
4926 10 2* Green, LightGreen
4927 11 6* Cyan, LightCyan
4928 12 1* Red, LightRed
4929 13 5* Magenta, LightMagenta
4930 14 3* Yellow, LightYellow
4931 15 7* White
4932
4933 The number under "NR-16" is used for 16-color terminals ('t_Co'
4934 greater than or equal to 16). The number under "NR-8" is used for
4935 8-color terminals ('t_Co' less than 16). The '*' indicates that the
4936 bold attribute is set for ctermfg. In many 8-color terminals (e.g.,
4937 "linux"), this causes the bright colors to appear. This doesn't work
4938 for background colors! Without the '*' the bold attribute is removed.
4939 If you want to set the bold attribute in a different way, put a
4940 "cterm=" argument AFTER the "ctermfg=" or "ctermbg=" argument. Or use
4941 a number instead of a color name.
4942
4943 The case of the color names is ignored.
4944 Note that for 16 color ansi style terminals (including xterms), the
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00004945 numbers in the NR-8 column is used. Here '*' means 'add 8' so that Blue
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004946 is 12, DarkGray is 8 etc.
4947
4948 Note that for some color terminals these names may result in the wrong
4949 colors!
4950
Bram Moolenaar5837f1f2015-03-21 18:06:14 +01004951 You can also use "NONE" to remove the color.
4952
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004953 *:hi-normal-cterm*
4954 When setting the "ctermfg" or "ctermbg" colors for the Normal group,
4955 these will become the colors used for the non-highlighted text.
4956 Example: >
4957 :highlight Normal ctermfg=grey ctermbg=darkblue
4958< When setting the "ctermbg" color for the Normal group, the
Bram Moolenaar6aa8cea2017-06-05 14:44:35 +02004959 'background' option will be adjusted automatically, under the
4960 condition that the color is recognized and 'background' was not set
4961 explicitly. This causes the highlight groups that depend on
4962 'background' to change! This means you should set the colors for
4963 Normal first, before setting other colors.
Bram Moolenaar723dd942019-04-04 13:11:03 +02004964 When a color scheme is being used, changing 'background' causes it to
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004965 be reloaded, which may reset all colors (including Normal). First
Bram Moolenaar8f3f58f2010-01-06 20:52:26 +01004966 delete the "g:colors_name" variable when you don't want this.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004967
4968 When you have set "ctermfg" or "ctermbg" for the Normal group, Vim
4969 needs to reset the color when exiting. This is done with the "op"
4970 termcap entry |t_op|. If this doesn't work correctly, try setting the
4971 't_op' option in your .vimrc.
4972 *E419* *E420*
4973 When Vim knows the normal foreground and background colors, "fg" and
4974 "bg" can be used as color names. This only works after setting the
4975 colors for the Normal group and for the MS-DOS console. Example, for
4976 reverse video: >
4977 :highlight Visual ctermfg=bg ctermbg=fg
4978< Note that the colors are used that are valid at the moment this
4979 command are given. If the Normal group colors are changed later, the
4980 "fg" and "bg" colors will not be adjusted.
4981
4982
49833. highlight arguments for the GUI
4984
4985gui={attr-list} *highlight-gui*
4986 These give the attributes to use in the GUI mode.
4987 See |attr-list| for a description.
4988 Note that "bold" can be used here and by using a bold font. They
4989 have the same effect.
4990 Note that the attributes are ignored for the "Normal" group.
4991
4992font={font-name} *highlight-font*
4993 font-name is the name of a font, as it is used on the system Vim
4994 runs on. For X11 this is a complicated name, for example: >
4995 font=-misc-fixed-bold-r-normal--14-130-75-75-c-70-iso8859-1
4996<
4997 The font-name "NONE" can be used to revert to the default font.
4998 When setting the font for the "Normal" group, this becomes the default
4999 font (until the 'guifont' option is changed; the last one set is
5000 used).
5001 The following only works with Motif and Athena, not with other GUIs:
5002 When setting the font for the "Menu" group, the menus will be changed.
5003 When setting the font for the "Tooltip" group, the tooltips will be
5004 changed.
5005 All fonts used, except for Menu and Tooltip, should be of the same
5006 character size as the default font! Otherwise redrawing problems will
5007 occur.
Bram Moolenaar82af8712016-06-04 20:20:29 +02005008 To use a font name with an embedded space or other special character,
5009 put it in single quotes. The single quote cannot be used then.
5010 Example: >
5011 :hi comment font='Monospace 10'
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005012
5013guifg={color-name} *highlight-guifg*
5014guibg={color-name} *highlight-guibg*
Bram Moolenaar5409c052005-03-18 20:27:04 +00005015guisp={color-name} *highlight-guisp*
5016 These give the foreground (guifg), background (guibg) and special
Bram Moolenaarcf4b00c2017-09-02 18:33:56 +02005017 (guisp) color to use in the GUI. "guisp" is used for undercurl and
5018 strikethrough.
Bram Moolenaar7df351e2006-01-23 22:30:28 +00005019 There are a few special names:
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005020 NONE no color (transparent)
5021 bg use normal background color
5022 background use normal background color
5023 fg use normal foreground color
5024 foreground use normal foreground color
5025 To use a color name with an embedded space or other special character,
5026 put it in single quotes. The single quote cannot be used then.
5027 Example: >
5028 :hi comment guifg='salmon pink'
5029<
5030 *gui-colors*
5031 Suggested color names (these are available on most systems):
5032 Red LightRed DarkRed
5033 Green LightGreen DarkGreen SeaGreen
5034 Blue LightBlue DarkBlue SlateBlue
5035 Cyan LightCyan DarkCyan
5036 Magenta LightMagenta DarkMagenta
5037 Yellow LightYellow Brown DarkYellow
5038 Gray LightGray DarkGray
5039 Black White
5040 Orange Purple Violet
5041
5042 In the Win32 GUI version, additional system colors are available. See
5043 |win32-colors|.
5044
5045 You can also specify a color by its Red, Green and Blue values.
5046 The format is "#rrggbb", where
5047 "rr" is the Red value
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005048 "gg" is the Green value
Bram Moolenaar5409c052005-03-18 20:27:04 +00005049 "bb" is the Blue value
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005050 All values are hexadecimal, range from "00" to "ff". Examples: >
5051 :highlight Comment guifg=#11f0c3 guibg=#ff00ff
5052<
5053 *highlight-groups* *highlight-default*
5054These are the default highlighting groups. These groups are used by the
5055'highlight' option default. Note that the highlighting depends on the value
5056of 'background'. You can see the current settings with the ":highlight"
5057command.
Bram Moolenaar1a384422010-07-14 19:53:30 +02005058 *hl-ColorColumn*
5059ColorColumn used for the columns set with 'colorcolumn'
Bram Moolenaar860cae12010-06-05 23:22:07 +02005060 *hl-Conceal*
5061Conceal placeholder characters substituted for concealed
5062 text (see 'conceallevel')
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005063 *hl-Cursor*
5064Cursor the character under the cursor
Bram Moolenaarf90b6e02019-05-09 19:26:38 +02005065lCursor the character under the cursor when |language-mapping|
5066 is used (see 'guicursor')
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005067 *hl-CursorIM*
5068CursorIM like Cursor, but used when in IME mode |CursorIM|
Bram Moolenaar5316eee2006-03-12 22:11:10 +00005069 *hl-CursorColumn*
5070CursorColumn the screen column that the cursor is in when 'cursorcolumn' is
5071 set
5072 *hl-CursorLine*
5073CursorLine the screen line that the cursor is in when 'cursorline' is
5074 set
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005075 *hl-Directory*
5076Directory directory names (and other special names in listings)
5077 *hl-DiffAdd*
5078DiffAdd diff mode: Added line |diff.txt|
5079 *hl-DiffChange*
5080DiffChange diff mode: Changed line |diff.txt|
5081 *hl-DiffDelete*
5082DiffDelete diff mode: Deleted line |diff.txt|
5083 *hl-DiffText*
5084DiffText diff mode: Changed text within a changed line |diff.txt|
Bram Moolenaardc1f1642016-08-16 18:33:43 +02005085 *hl-EndOfBuffer*
Bram Moolenaar58b85342016-08-14 19:54:54 +02005086EndOfBuffer filler lines (~) after the last line in the buffer.
5087 By default, this is highlighted like |hl-NonText|.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005088 *hl-ErrorMsg*
5089ErrorMsg error messages on the command line
5090 *hl-VertSplit*
5091VertSplit the column separating vertically split windows
5092 *hl-Folded*
5093Folded line used for closed folds
5094 *hl-FoldColumn*
5095FoldColumn 'foldcolumn'
5096 *hl-SignColumn*
5097SignColumn column where |signs| are displayed
5098 *hl-IncSearch*
5099IncSearch 'incsearch' highlighting; also used for the text replaced with
5100 ":s///c"
5101 *hl-LineNr*
Bram Moolenaarfd2ac762006-03-01 22:09:21 +00005102LineNr Line number for ":number" and ":#" commands, and when 'number'
Bram Moolenaar64486672010-05-16 15:46:46 +02005103 or 'relativenumber' option is set.
Bram Moolenaarefae76a2019-10-27 22:54:58 +01005104 *hl-LineNrAbove*
5105LineNrAbove Line number for when the 'relativenumber'
5106 option is set, above the cursor line.
5107 *hl-LineNrBelow*
5108LineNrBelow Line number for when the 'relativenumber'
5109 option is set, below the cursor line.
Bram Moolenaar61d35bd2012-03-28 20:51:51 +02005110 *hl-CursorLineNr*
Bram Moolenaar410e98a2019-09-09 22:05:49 +02005111CursorLineNr Like LineNr when 'cursorline' is set and 'cursorlineopt' is
5112 set to "number" or "both", or 'relativenumber' is set, for
Bram Moolenaara3e6bc92013-01-30 14:18:00 +01005113 the cursor line.
Bram Moolenaarfd2ac762006-03-01 22:09:21 +00005114 *hl-MatchParen*
5115MatchParen The character under the cursor or just before it, if it
5116 is a paired bracket, and its match. |pi_paren.txt|
5117
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005118 *hl-ModeMsg*
5119ModeMsg 'showmode' message (e.g., "-- INSERT --")
5120 *hl-MoreMsg*
5121MoreMsg |more-prompt|
5122 *hl-NonText*
Bram Moolenaar58b85342016-08-14 19:54:54 +02005123NonText '@' at the end of the window, characters from 'showbreak'
5124 and other characters that do not really exist in the text
5125 (e.g., ">" displayed when a double-wide character doesn't
5126 fit at the end of the line).
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005127 *hl-Normal*
5128Normal normal text
Bram Moolenaar1c7715d2005-10-03 22:02:18 +00005129 *hl-Pmenu*
5130Pmenu Popup menu: normal item.
5131 *hl-PmenuSel*
5132PmenuSel Popup menu: selected item.
5133 *hl-PmenuSbar*
5134PmenuSbar Popup menu: scrollbar.
5135 *hl-PmenuThumb*
5136PmenuThumb Popup menu: Thumb of the scrollbar.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005137 *hl-Question*
5138Question |hit-enter| prompt and yes/no questions
Bram Moolenaar74675a62017-07-15 13:53:23 +02005139 *hl-QuickFixLine*
5140QuickFixLine Current |quickfix| item in the quickfix window.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005141 *hl-Search*
5142Search Last search pattern highlighting (see 'hlsearch').
Bram Moolenaar74675a62017-07-15 13:53:23 +02005143 Also used for similar items that need to stand out.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005144 *hl-SpecialKey*
5145SpecialKey Meta and special keys listed with ":map", also for text used
5146 to show unprintable characters in the text, 'listchars'.
5147 Generally: text that is displayed differently from what it
5148 really is.
Bram Moolenaar217ad922005-03-20 22:37:15 +00005149 *hl-SpellBad*
5150SpellBad Word that is not recognized by the spellchecker. |spell|
5151 This will be combined with the highlighting used otherwise.
Bram Moolenaar53180ce2005-07-05 21:48:14 +00005152 *hl-SpellCap*
5153SpellCap Word that should start with a capital. |spell|
5154 This will be combined with the highlighting used otherwise.
Bram Moolenaar217ad922005-03-20 22:37:15 +00005155 *hl-SpellLocal*
5156SpellLocal Word that is recognized by the spellchecker as one that is
5157 used in another region. |spell|
5158 This will be combined with the highlighting used otherwise.
5159 *hl-SpellRare*
5160SpellRare Word that is recognized by the spellchecker as one that is
5161 hardly ever used. |spell|
5162 This will be combined with the highlighting used otherwise.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005163 *hl-StatusLine*
5164StatusLine status line of current window
5165 *hl-StatusLineNC*
5166StatusLineNC status lines of not-current windows
5167 Note: if this is equal to "StatusLine" Vim will use "^^^" in
5168 the status line of the current window.
Bram Moolenaar40962ec2018-01-28 22:47:25 +01005169 *hl-StatusLineTerm*
5170StatusLineTerm status line of current window, if it is a |terminal| window.
5171 *hl-StatusLineTermNC*
5172StatusLineTermNC status lines of not-current windows that is a |terminal|
5173 window.
Bram Moolenaarfaa959a2006-02-20 21:37:40 +00005174 *hl-TabLine*
5175TabLine tab pages line, not active tab page label
5176 *hl-TabLineFill*
5177TabLineFill tab pages line, where there are no labels
5178 *hl-TabLineSel*
5179TabLineSel tab pages line, active tab page label
Bram Moolenaardf980db2017-12-24 13:22:00 +01005180 *hl-Terminal*
5181Terminal |terminal| window (see |terminal-size-color|)
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005182 *hl-Title*
5183Title titles for output from ":set all", ":autocmd" etc.
5184 *hl-Visual*
5185Visual Visual mode selection
5186 *hl-VisualNOS*
5187VisualNOS Visual mode selection when vim is "Not Owning the Selection".
5188 Only X11 Gui's |gui-x11| and |xterm-clipboard| supports this.
5189 *hl-WarningMsg*
5190WarningMsg warning messages
5191 *hl-WildMenu*
5192WildMenu current match in 'wildmenu' completion
5193
Bram Moolenaarf75a9632005-09-13 21:20:47 +00005194 *hl-User1* *hl-User1..9* *hl-User9*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005195The 'statusline' syntax allows the use of 9 different highlights in the
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00005196statusline and ruler (via 'rulerformat'). The names are User1 to User9.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005197
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00005198For the GUI you can use the following groups to set the colors for the menu,
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005199scrollbars and tooltips. They don't have defaults. This doesn't work for the
5200Win32 GUI. Only three highlight arguments have any effect here: font, guibg,
5201and guifg.
5202
5203 *hl-Menu*
5204Menu Current font, background and foreground colors of the menus.
5205 Also used for the toolbar.
5206 Applicable highlight arguments: font, guibg, guifg.
5207
5208 NOTE: For Motif and Athena the font argument actually
5209 specifies a fontset at all times, no matter if 'guifontset' is
5210 empty, and as such it is tied to the current |:language| when
5211 set.
5212
5213 *hl-Scrollbar*
5214Scrollbar Current background and foreground of the main window's
5215 scrollbars.
5216 Applicable highlight arguments: guibg, guifg.
5217
5218 *hl-Tooltip*
5219Tooltip Current font, background and foreground of the tooltips.
5220 Applicable highlight arguments: font, guibg, guifg.
5221
5222 NOTE: For Motif and Athena the font argument actually
5223 specifies a fontset at all times, no matter if 'guifontset' is
5224 empty, and as such it is tied to the current |:language| when
5225 set.
5226
5227==============================================================================
Bram Moolenaar9d87a372018-12-18 21:41:50 +0100522814. Linking groups *:hi-link* *:highlight-link* *E412* *E413*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005229
5230When you want to use the same highlighting for several syntax groups, you
5231can do this more easily by linking the groups into one common highlight
5232group, and give the color attributes only for that group.
5233
5234To set a link:
5235
5236 :hi[ghlight][!] [default] link {from-group} {to-group}
5237
5238To remove a link:
5239
5240 :hi[ghlight][!] [default] link {from-group} NONE
5241
5242Notes: *E414*
5243- If the {from-group} and/or {to-group} doesn't exist, it is created. You
5244 don't get an error message for a non-existing group.
5245- As soon as you use a ":highlight" command for a linked group, the link is
5246 removed.
5247- If there are already highlight settings for the {from-group}, the link is
5248 not made, unless the '!' is given. For a ":highlight link" command in a
5249 sourced file, you don't get an error message. This can be used to skip
5250 links for groups that already have settings.
5251
5252 *:hi-default* *:highlight-default*
5253The [default] argument is used for setting the default highlighting for a
5254group. If highlighting has already been specified for the group the command
5255will be ignored. Also when there is an existing link.
5256
5257Using [default] is especially useful to overrule the highlighting of a
5258specific syntax file. For example, the C syntax file contains: >
5259 :highlight default link cComment Comment
5260If you like Question highlighting for C comments, put this in your vimrc file: >
5261 :highlight link cComment Question
5262Without the "default" in the C syntax file, the highlighting would be
5263overruled when the syntax file is loaded.
5264
5265==============================================================================
Bram Moolenaar9d87a372018-12-18 21:41:50 +0100526615. Cleaning up *:syn-clear* *E391*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005267
5268If you want to clear the syntax stuff for the current buffer, you can use this
5269command: >
5270 :syntax clear
5271
5272This command should be used when you want to switch off syntax highlighting,
5273or when you want to switch to using another syntax. It's normally not needed
5274in a syntax file itself, because syntax is cleared by the autocommands that
5275load the syntax file.
5276The command also deletes the "b:current_syntax" variable, since no syntax is
5277loaded after this command.
5278
Bram Moolenaar61da1bf2019-06-06 12:14:49 +02005279To clean up specific syntax groups for the current buffer: >
5280 :syntax clear {group-name} ..
5281This removes all patterns and keywords for {group-name}.
5282
5283To clean up specific syntax group lists for the current buffer: >
5284 :syntax clear @{grouplist-name} ..
5285This sets {grouplist-name}'s contents to an empty list.
5286
5287 *:syntax-off* *:syn-off*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005288If you want to disable syntax highlighting for all buffers, you need to remove
5289the autocommands that load the syntax files: >
5290 :syntax off
5291
5292What this command actually does, is executing the command >
5293 :source $VIMRUNTIME/syntax/nosyntax.vim
5294See the "nosyntax.vim" file for details. Note that for this to work
5295$VIMRUNTIME must be valid. See |$VIMRUNTIME|.
5296
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005297 *:syntax-reset* *:syn-reset*
5298If you have changed the colors and messed them up, use this command to get the
5299defaults back: >
5300
5301 :syntax reset
5302
Bram Moolenaar03413f42016-04-12 21:07:15 +02005303It is a bit of a wrong name, since it does not reset any syntax items, it only
5304affects the highlighting.
5305
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005306This doesn't change the colors for the 'highlight' option.
5307
5308Note that the syntax colors that you set in your vimrc file will also be reset
5309back to their Vim default.
5310Note that if you are using a color scheme, the colors defined by the color
5311scheme for syntax highlighting will be lost.
5312
5313What this actually does is: >
5314
5315 let g:syntax_cmd = "reset"
5316 runtime! syntax/syncolor.vim
5317
5318Note that this uses the 'runtimepath' option.
5319
5320 *syncolor*
5321If you want to use different colors for syntax highlighting, you can add a Vim
5322script file to set these colors. Put this file in a directory in
5323'runtimepath' which comes after $VIMRUNTIME, so that your settings overrule
5324the default colors. This way these colors will be used after the ":syntax
5325reset" command.
5326
5327For Unix you can use the file ~/.vim/after/syntax/syncolor.vim. Example: >
5328
5329 if &background == "light"
5330 highlight comment ctermfg=darkgreen guifg=darkgreen
5331 else
5332 highlight comment ctermfg=green guifg=green
5333 endif
5334
Bram Moolenaarc0197e22004-09-13 20:26:32 +00005335 *E679*
5336Do make sure this syncolor.vim script does not use a "syntax on", set the
5337'background' option or uses a "colorscheme" command, because it results in an
5338endless loop.
5339
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005340Note that when a color scheme is used, there might be some confusion whether
5341your defined colors are to be used or the colors from the scheme. This
5342depends on the color scheme file. See |:colorscheme|.
5343
5344 *syntax_cmd*
5345The "syntax_cmd" variable is set to one of these values when the
5346syntax/syncolor.vim files are loaded:
5347 "on" ":syntax on" command. Highlight colors are overruled but
5348 links are kept
5349 "enable" ":syntax enable" command. Only define colors for groups that
5350 don't have highlighting yet. Use ":syntax default".
5351 "reset" ":syntax reset" command or loading a color scheme. Define all
5352 the colors.
5353 "skip" Don't define colors. Used to skip the default settings when a
5354 syncolor.vim file earlier in 'runtimepath' has already set
5355 them.
5356
5357==============================================================================
Bram Moolenaar9d87a372018-12-18 21:41:50 +0100535816. Highlighting tags *tag-highlight*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005359
5360If you want to highlight all the tags in your file, you can use the following
5361mappings.
5362
5363 <F11> -- Generate tags.vim file, and highlight tags.
5364 <F12> -- Just highlight tags based on existing tags.vim file.
5365>
5366 :map <F11> :sp tags<CR>:%s/^\([^ :]*:\)\=\([^ ]*\).*/syntax keyword Tag \2/<CR>:wq! tags.vim<CR>/^<CR><F12>
5367 :map <F12> :so tags.vim<CR>
5368
5369WARNING: The longer the tags file, the slower this will be, and the more
5370memory Vim will consume.
5371
5372Only highlighting typedefs, unions and structs can be done too. For this you
5373must use Exuberant ctags (found at http://ctags.sf.net).
5374
5375Put these lines in your Makefile:
5376
5377# Make a highlight file for types. Requires Exuberant ctags and awk
5378types: types.vim
5379types.vim: *.[ch]
Bram Moolenaarc81e5e72007-05-05 18:24:42 +00005380 ctags --c-kinds=gstu -o- *.[ch] |\
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005381 awk 'BEGIN{printf("syntax keyword Type\t")}\
5382 {printf("%s ", $$1)}END{print ""}' > $@
5383
5384And put these lines in your .vimrc: >
5385
5386 " load the types.vim highlighting file, if it exists
5387 autocmd BufRead,BufNewFile *.[ch] let fname = expand('<afile>:p:h') . '/types.vim'
5388 autocmd BufRead,BufNewFile *.[ch] if filereadable(fname)
5389 autocmd BufRead,BufNewFile *.[ch] exe 'so ' . fname
5390 autocmd BufRead,BufNewFile *.[ch] endif
5391
5392==============================================================================
Bram Moolenaar9d87a372018-12-18 21:41:50 +0100539317. Window-local syntax *:ownsyntax*
Bram Moolenaar860cae12010-06-05 23:22:07 +02005394
5395Normally all windows on a buffer share the same syntax settings. It is
5396possible, however, to set a particular window on a file to have its own
5397private syntax setting. A possible example would be to edit LaTeX source
5398with conventional highlighting in one window, while seeing the same source
5399highlighted differently (so as to hide control sequences and indicate bold,
5400italic etc regions) in another. The 'scrollbind' option is useful here.
5401
5402To set the current window to have the syntax "foo", separately from all other
5403windows on the buffer: >
5404 :ownsyntax foo
Bram Moolenaardebe25a2010-06-06 17:41:24 +02005405< *w:current_syntax*
5406This will set the "w:current_syntax" variable to "foo". The value of
5407"b:current_syntax" does not change. This is implemented by saving and
5408restoring "b:current_syntax", since the syntax files do set
5409"b:current_syntax". The value set by the syntax file is assigned to
5410"w:current_syntax".
Bram Moolenaared32d942014-12-06 23:33:00 +01005411Note: This resets the 'spell', 'spellcapcheck' and 'spellfile' options.
Bram Moolenaar860cae12010-06-05 23:22:07 +02005412
5413Once a window has its own syntax, syntax commands executed from other windows
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02005414on the same buffer (including :syntax clear) have no effect. Conversely,
Bram Moolenaarbf884932013-04-05 22:26:15 +02005415syntax commands executed from that window do not affect other windows on the
Bram Moolenaar860cae12010-06-05 23:22:07 +02005416same buffer.
5417
Bram Moolenaardebe25a2010-06-06 17:41:24 +02005418A window with its own syntax reverts to normal behavior when another buffer
5419is loaded into that window or the file is reloaded.
5420When splitting the window, the new window will use the original syntax.
Bram Moolenaar860cae12010-06-05 23:22:07 +02005421
5422==============================================================================
Bram Moolenaar9d87a372018-12-18 21:41:50 +0100542318. Color xterms *xterm-color* *color-xterm*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005424
5425Most color xterms have only eight colors. If you don't get colors with the
5426default setup, it should work with these lines in your .vimrc: >
5427 :if &term =~ "xterm"
5428 : if has("terminfo")
5429 : set t_Co=8
5430 : set t_Sf=<Esc>[3%p1%dm
5431 : set t_Sb=<Esc>[4%p1%dm
5432 : else
5433 : set t_Co=8
5434 : set t_Sf=<Esc>[3%dm
5435 : set t_Sb=<Esc>[4%dm
5436 : endif
5437 :endif
5438< [<Esc> is a real escape, type CTRL-V <Esc>]
5439
5440You might want to change the first "if" to match the name of your terminal,
5441e.g. "dtterm" instead of "xterm".
5442
5443Note: Do these settings BEFORE doing ":syntax on". Otherwise the colors may
5444be wrong.
5445 *xiterm* *rxvt*
5446The above settings have been mentioned to work for xiterm and rxvt too.
5447But for using 16 colors in an rxvt these should work with terminfo: >
5448 :set t_AB=<Esc>[%?%p1%{8}%<%t25;%p1%{40}%+%e5;%p1%{32}%+%;%dm
5449 :set t_AF=<Esc>[%?%p1%{8}%<%t22;%p1%{30}%+%e1;%p1%{22}%+%;%dm
5450<
5451 *colortest.vim*
5452To test your color setup, a file has been included in the Vim distribution.
Bram Moolenaarf740b292006-02-16 22:11:02 +00005453To use it, execute this command: >
5454 :runtime syntax/colortest.vim
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005455
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00005456Some versions of xterm (and other terminals, like the Linux console) can
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005457output lighter foreground colors, even though the number of colors is defined
5458at 8. Therefore Vim sets the "cterm=bold" attribute for light foreground
5459colors, when 't_Co' is 8.
5460
5461 *xfree-xterm*
5462To get 16 colors or more, get the newest xterm version (which should be
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00005463included with XFree86 3.3 and later). You can also find the latest version
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005464at: >
5465 http://invisible-island.net/xterm/xterm.html
5466Here is a good way to configure it. This uses 88 colors and enables the
5467termcap-query feature, which allows Vim to ask the xterm how many colors it
5468supports. >
5469 ./configure --disable-bold-color --enable-88-color --enable-tcap-query
5470If you only get 8 colors, check the xterm compilation settings.
5471(Also see |UTF8-xterm| for using this xterm with UTF-8 character encoding).
5472
5473This xterm should work with these lines in your .vimrc (for 16 colors): >
5474 :if has("terminfo")
5475 : set t_Co=16
5476 : set t_AB=<Esc>[%?%p1%{8}%<%t%p1%{40}%+%e%p1%{92}%+%;%dm
5477 : set t_AF=<Esc>[%?%p1%{8}%<%t%p1%{30}%+%e%p1%{82}%+%;%dm
5478 :else
5479 : set t_Co=16
5480 : set t_Sf=<Esc>[3%dm
5481 : set t_Sb=<Esc>[4%dm
5482 :endif
5483< [<Esc> is a real escape, type CTRL-V <Esc>]
5484
5485Without |+terminfo|, Vim will recognize these settings, and automatically
5486translate cterm colors of 8 and above to "<Esc>[9%dm" and "<Esc>[10%dm".
5487Colors above 16 are also translated automatically.
5488
5489For 256 colors this has been reported to work: >
5490
5491 :set t_AB=<Esc>[48;5;%dm
5492 :set t_AF=<Esc>[38;5;%dm
5493
5494Or just set the TERM environment variable to "xterm-color" or "xterm-16color"
5495and try if that works.
5496
5497You probably want to use these X resources (in your ~/.Xdefaults file):
5498 XTerm*color0: #000000
5499 XTerm*color1: #c00000
5500 XTerm*color2: #008000
5501 XTerm*color3: #808000
5502 XTerm*color4: #0000c0
5503 XTerm*color5: #c000c0
5504 XTerm*color6: #008080
5505 XTerm*color7: #c0c0c0
5506 XTerm*color8: #808080
5507 XTerm*color9: #ff6060
5508 XTerm*color10: #00ff00
5509 XTerm*color11: #ffff00
5510 XTerm*color12: #8080ff
5511 XTerm*color13: #ff40ff
5512 XTerm*color14: #00ffff
5513 XTerm*color15: #ffffff
5514 Xterm*cursorColor: Black
5515
5516[Note: The cursorColor is required to work around a bug, which changes the
5517cursor color to the color of the last drawn text. This has been fixed by a
Bram Moolenaarc81e5e72007-05-05 18:24:42 +00005518newer version of xterm, but not everybody is using it yet.]
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005519
5520To get these right away, reload the .Xdefaults file to the X Option database
5521Manager (you only need to do this when you just changed the .Xdefaults file): >
5522 xrdb -merge ~/.Xdefaults
5523<
5524 *xterm-blink* *xterm-blinking-cursor*
5525To make the cursor blink in an xterm, see tools/blink.c. Or use Thomas
5526Dickey's xterm above patchlevel 107 (see above for where to get it), with
5527these resources:
5528 XTerm*cursorBlink: on
5529 XTerm*cursorOnTime: 400
5530 XTerm*cursorOffTime: 250
5531 XTerm*cursorColor: White
5532
5533 *hpterm-color*
Bram Moolenaarc81e5e72007-05-05 18:24:42 +00005534These settings work (more or less) for an hpterm, which only supports 8
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005535foreground colors: >
5536 :if has("terminfo")
5537 : set t_Co=8
5538 : set t_Sf=<Esc>[&v%p1%dS
5539 : set t_Sb=<Esc>[&v7S
5540 :else
5541 : set t_Co=8
5542 : set t_Sf=<Esc>[&v%dS
5543 : set t_Sb=<Esc>[&v7S
5544 :endif
5545< [<Esc> is a real escape, type CTRL-V <Esc>]
5546
5547 *Eterm* *enlightened-terminal*
5548These settings have been reported to work for the Enlightened terminal
5549emulator, or Eterm. They might work for all xterm-like terminals that use the
5550bold attribute to get bright colors. Add an ":if" like above when needed. >
5551 :set t_Co=16
5552 :set t_AF=^[[%?%p1%{8}%<%t3%p1%d%e%p1%{22}%+%d;1%;m
5553 :set t_AB=^[[%?%p1%{8}%<%t4%p1%d%e%p1%{32}%+%d;1%;m
5554<
5555 *TTpro-telnet*
5556These settings should work for TTpro telnet. Tera Term Pro is a freeware /
5557open-source program for MS-Windows. >
5558 set t_Co=16
5559 set t_AB=^[[%?%p1%{8}%<%t%p1%{40}%+%e%p1%{32}%+5;%;%dm
5560 set t_AF=^[[%?%p1%{8}%<%t%p1%{30}%+%e%p1%{22}%+1;%;%dm
5561Also make sure TTpro's Setup / Window / Full Color is enabled, and make sure
5562that Setup / Font / Enable Bold is NOT enabled.
5563(info provided by John Love-Jensen <eljay@Adobe.COM>)
5564
Bram Moolenaar8a7f5a22013-06-06 14:01:46 +02005565
5566==============================================================================
Bram Moolenaar9d87a372018-12-18 21:41:50 +0100556719. When syntax is slow *:syntime*
Bram Moolenaar8a7f5a22013-06-06 14:01:46 +02005568
5569This is aimed at authors of a syntax file.
5570
5571If your syntax causes redrawing to be slow, here are a few hints on making it
5572faster. To see slowness switch on some features that usually interfere, such
5573as 'relativenumber' and |folding|.
5574
Bram Moolenaar203d04d2013-06-06 21:36:40 +02005575Note: this is only available when compiled with the |+profile| feature.
5576You many need to build Vim with "huge" features.
5577
Bram Moolenaar8a7f5a22013-06-06 14:01:46 +02005578To find out what patterns are consuming most time, get an overview with this
5579sequence: >
5580 :syntime on
5581 [ redraw the text at least once with CTRL-L ]
5582 :syntime report
5583
5584This will display a list of syntax patterns that were used, sorted by the time
5585it took to match them against the text.
5586
5587:syntime on Start measuring syntax times. This will add some
5588 overhead to compute the time spent on syntax pattern
5589 matching.
5590
5591:syntime off Stop measuring syntax times.
5592
5593:syntime clear Set all the counters to zero, restart measuring.
5594
5595:syntime report Show the syntax items used since ":syntime on" in the
5596 current window. Use a wider display to see more of
5597 the output.
5598
5599 The list is sorted by total time. The columns are:
5600 TOTAL Total time in seconds spent on
5601 matching this pattern.
5602 COUNT Number of times the pattern was used.
5603 MATCH Number of times the pattern actually
5604 matched
5605 SLOWEST The longest time for one try.
5606 AVERAGE The average time for one try.
5607 NAME Name of the syntax item. Note that
5608 this is not unique.
5609 PATTERN The pattern being used.
5610
5611Pattern matching gets slow when it has to try many alternatives. Try to
5612include as much literal text as possible to reduce the number of ways a
5613pattern does NOT match.
5614
5615When using the "\@<=" and "\@<!" items, add a maximum size to avoid trying at
5616all positions in the current and previous line. For example, if the item is
5617literal text specify the size of that text (in bytes):
5618
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02005619"<\@<=span" Matches "span" in "<span". This tries matching with "<" in
Bram Moolenaar8a7f5a22013-06-06 14:01:46 +02005620 many places.
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02005621"<\@1<=span" Matches the same, but only tries one byte before "span".
Bram Moolenaar8a7f5a22013-06-06 14:01:46 +02005622
5623
Bram Moolenaar91f84f62018-07-29 15:07:52 +02005624 vim:tw=78:sw=4:ts=8:noet:ft=help:norl: